# 1 0 C A G/ 10 C H G/ 10 CG -2.4 G H z 10- C HANNEL RADIO C ONTROL S Y S TEM 

# INSTRUCTION MANUAL

T

echnical updates and additional programming examples available at: h tt p ://www.futaba-rc.com/fa q Entire C ontents ©C opyright 200 9 1 M 23 N 2100 72 TABLE OF CONTENTS INTRODUCTION ........................................................... 3 Additional Technical Help, Support and Service ........ 3 $SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ ........................ 4 Meaning of Special Markings ..................................... 5 Safety Precautions (do not operate without reading) .. 5 Introduction to the 10CG ............................................ 7 &RQWHQWVDQG7HFKQLFDO6SHFL¿FDWLRQV ........................ 9 Accessories ............................................................... 10 Transmitter Controls & 6ZLWFK,GHQWL¿FDWLRQ$VVLJQPHQWV ............................. 11 Charging the Ni-Cd Batteries ................................... 15 Stick Adjustments ..................................................... 16 Adjusting display contrast ........................................ 16 Changing mode.......................................................... 17 Power Down mode .................................................... 17 CAMPacLQLWLDOL]LQJDQGGDWDFRQYHUVLRQ&&6WR&* .... 17 Radio Installation & Range Checking ...................... 18 Transmitter Displays and Buttons ............................. 23 Warning and Error Displays ..................................... 24 AIRPLANE (ACRO ) FUNCTIONS ................................ 25 Map of Functions........................................................ 26 Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane ...... 27 ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................................ 30 MODELSubmenu: MODEL SELECT , COPY , NAME .......... 30 PARAMETER Submenu: RESET , TYPE , MODUL , ATL , AILE-2 , THRREV , CONTRAST , BACK-LIGHT , HOME-DISP , USER NAME ........ 33 LOGIC SW ..................................................................... 38 Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38 END POINT .................................................................. 39 Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT .............. 40 'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ) .......... 42 TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45 Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUX-CH ) . 46 TRAINER ..................................................................... 47 TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48 SERVO Display ........................................................... 49 Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe ( F/S ) ......................... 50 ACRO ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ........................... 51 Wing types ................................................................ 51 FLAPERON ................................................................... 52 FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53 Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF ) ................................. 54 Using Twin Aileron Servos: AILE-2 ........................... 55 ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56 Tail types ................................................................... 56 ELEVON ....................................................................... 56 Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR ) ............................ 57 V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58 SNAP ROLL .................................................................. 59 0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61 ELEV-FLAP .................................................................... 62 AIRBRAKE BUTTERFLY (crow) ..................................... 63 THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65 THROTTLE DELAY ......................................................... 66 THROTTLE CURVE ........................................................ 67 Linear, Prog. mixes1-4 ............................................. 68 Curve, Prog. mixes5-8 ............................................. 71 GYA gyro mixing ( GYRO SENSE ) ............................... 73 Other Equipment ....................................................... 74 GLIDER ( GLID(1A+1F)  (2A+1F)  (2A+2F) ) FUNCTIONS . 75 Table of contents........................................................ 75 Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider ................ 76 GLIDER-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ........ 78 Model type ( PARAMETER submenu) ........................... 78 MOTOR CUT ................................................................ 79 GLIDER-SPECIFIC ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ..... 80 AILE/RUDD .................................................................. 81 AILE-FLAP( GLID(2A+2F) only) .................................... 82 SPOILER MIX ............................................................... 83 OFFSETs$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV ...................... 84 START DELAY ( GLID(1A+1F) only) ................................. 85 CAMBER MIX ............................................................... 85 CAMBER FLAP .............................................................. 86 BUTTERFLY ................................................................... 87 Channel 3’s function selection ( CONDITION/FUNCTION ) 88 HELICOPTER FUNCTIONS.......................................... 89 Table of contents and reference info for helicopters . 89 Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter ................... 90 HELI -SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................ 93 MODEL TYPE( PARAMETERSsubmenu) ........................ 93 SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel correction) (not in H-1 ) .............................................. 95 Setting up the Normal Flight Condition ................... 97 THR-CUTVSHFLDOL]HGVHWWLQJVIRUKHOLFRSWHUVSHFL¿F models) ..................................................................... 98 HELI -SPECIFIC ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ........... 99 THROTTLE HOLD .......................................................... 99 THR-CURVE , PIT-CURVEand REVO ............................. 100 Idle-ups ................................................................... 101 7ULPVRIIVHW ............................................................. 102 Delay ....................................................................... 103 Hovering setups ...................................................... 104 +LJKORZSLWFK ........................................................ 105 Gyros and governors ............................................... 106 THROTTLE MIX ............................................................ 96 SWASH RING .............................................................. 96 Glossary ........................................................................ 110 Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or abbreviation, as seen on the screen of the 10C, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s screen, including capitalization and shown in a DIFFERENT TYPE STYLEfor clarity. Any time we mention a specific control on the radio itself, such as moving SWITCH A , KNOB VR(B) , or the THROTTLE STICK , those words will be displayed as they are here.3 INTRODUCTION Thank you for purchasing a Futaba ®FASST-2.4GHz * &* VHULHV GLJLWDO SURSRUWLRQDO5& V\VWHP7KLV V\VWHPLV extremely versatile and may be used by beginners and pros alike. In order for you to make the best use of your system DQGWRÀ\VDIHO\SOHDVHUHDGWKLVPDQXDOFDUHIXOO\,I\RXKDY HDQ\GLI¿FXOWLHVZKLOHXVLQJ\RXUV\VWHPSOHDVHFRQVXOWWKH manual, our online Frequently Asked Questions (on the web pages referenced below), your hobby dealer, or the Futaba Service Center. *FASST: Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology Owner’s Manual and Additional Technical Help This manual has been carefully written to be as helpful to you, the new owner, as possible. There are many pages of setup procedures and examples. However, it need not be your sole resource of setup guidelines for your 10CG. For example, pages 27-29 include setup instructions for a basic 4-channel airplane. The Frequently Asked Questions web pagereferenced below includes this type of step-by-step setup instructions for a variety of other model types, including multiengine, complex gear installation, 7-servo aerobatic models, 140 degree CCPM, etc. KWWSZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT Due to unforeseen changes in production procedures, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Support and Service: It is recommended to have your Futaba equipment serviced annually during your hobby’s “off season” to ensure safe operation. IN NORTH AMERICA Please feel free to contact the Futaba Service Center for assistance in operation, use and programming. Please be sure to UHJXODUO\YLVLWWKH&*)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQVZHE VLWHDW ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT7KLVSDJHLQFOXGHVH[WHQVLYH programming, use, set up and safety information on the 10CG radio system and is updated regularly. Any technical XSGDWHVDQG86PDQXDOFRUUHFWLRQVZLOOEHDYDLODEOHRQWKLVZHE SDJH,I\RXGRQRW¿QGWKHDQVZHUVWR\RXUTXHVWLRQV there, please see the end of our F.A.Q. area for information on contacting us via email for the most rapid and convenient response. Don’t have Internet access? Internet access is available at no charge at most public libraries, schools, and other public UHVRXUFHV:H¿QGLQWHUQHWVXSSRUWWREHD IDEXORXV UHIHUHQFH I RUPDQ\PRGHOHUVDVLWHPVFDQEHSULQWHGDQGVDYHG IRU future reference, and can be accessed at any hour of the day, night, weekend or holiday. If you do not wish to access the internet for information, however, don’t worry. Our support teams are available Monday through Friday 8-5 Central time to assist you. FOR SERVICE ONLY: Futaba Service Center 3002 N. Apollo Drive, Suite 1 Champaign, IL 61822 Phone: 217-398-0007 ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPVHUYLFHKWPO

Email: service@futaba-rc.com FOR SUPPORT : (PROGRAMMING AND USER QUESTIONS)

Please start here for answers to most questions: ZZZIXWDEDUFFRPIDT FACSIMILE: 217-398-7721 PHONE: 217-398-8970 option 2

OUTSIDE NORTH AMERICA Please contact your Futaba importer in your region of the world to assist you with any questions, problems or service needs. Please recognize that all information in this manual, and all support availability, is based upon the systems sold in North America only. Products purchased elsewhere may vary. Always contact your region’s support center for assistance.4 $SSOLFDWLRQ([SRUWDQG0RGL¿FDWLRQ 1. This product may be used for model airplane or surface (boat, car, robot) use. It is not intended for use in any application other than the control of models for hobby and recreational purposes. The product is subject to regulations of the Ministry RI5DGLR7HOHFRPPXQLFDWLRQVDQGLVUHVWULFWHGXQGHU-DSDQHVHODZWRVXFKSXUSRVHV 2. Exportation precautions: (a) When this product is exported from the country of manufacture, its use is to be approved by the laws governing the country of destination which govern devices that emit radio frequencies. If this product is then re-exported to other countries, it may be subject to restrictions on such export. Prior approval of the appropriate government authorities may be required. If you have purchased this product from an exporter outside your country, and not the authorized Futaba distributor in your country, please contact the seller immediately to determine if such export regulations have been met. (b) Use of this product with other than models may be restricted by Export and Trade Control Regulations, and an application for export approval must be submitted. This equipment must not be utilized to operate equipment other than radio controlled models. 0RGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQWDQGUHSODFHPHQWRISDUWV)XWDEDLV QRWUHVSRQVLEOHIRUXQDXWKRUL]HGPRGL¿FDWLRQDGMXVWPHQW and replacement of parts on this product. Any such changes may void the warranty.
Compliance Information Statement (for U.S.A.) 7KLVGHYLFHWUDGHQDPH)XWDED&RUSRUDWLRQRI$PHULFDPRGHOQXPEHU5+65+6FRPSOLHVZLWKSDUWRIWKH FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that may cause undesiredoperation. The responsible party of this device compliance is: Futaba Service Center 3002 N Apollo Drive Suite 1, Champaign, IL 61822 U.S.A. TEL (217)398-8970 or E-mail: support@futaba-rc.com (Support) TEL (217)398-0007 or E-mail: service@futaba-rc.com (Service)
The RBRC. SEAL on the nickel-cadmium battery contained in Futaba products indicates that Futaba Corporation of America is voluntarily participating in an industry-wide program to collect and recycle these batteries at the end of their useful lives, when taken out of service within the United States. The RBRC. program provides a convenient alternative to placing used nickel-cadmium batteries into the trash or municipal waste system, which is illegal in some areas. (for USA) You may contact your local recycling center for information on where to return the spent battery. Please call 1-800-8BATTERY for information on Ni-Cd battery recycling in your area. Futaba Corporation of America’s involvement in this program is part of its commitment to protecting our environment and conserving natural resources. *RBRC is a trademark of the Rechargeable Battery Recycling Corporation.5 Meaning of Special Markings Pay special attention to safety where indicated by the following marks: DANGER 3URFHGXUHVZKLFKPD\OHDGWRGDQJHURXVFRQGLWLRQVDQGFDXVH GHDWKVHULRXVLQMXU\LIQRWFDUULHGRXW properly. WARNING- Procedures which may lead to a dangerous condition or cause death or serious injury to the user if QRWFDUULHGRXWSURSHUO\RUSURFHGXUHVZKHUHWKHSUREDELOLW\R IVXSHU¿FLDOLQMXU\RUSK\VLFDOGDPDJHLVKLJK CAUTION- Procedures where the possibility of serious injury to the user is small, but there is a danger of injury, or physical damage, if not carried out properly. = Prohibited = Mandatory Warning : Always keep electrical components away from small children. FLYING SAFETY WARNING To ensure the safety of yourself and others, please observe the following precautions: Have regular maintenance performed. Although your 10CG protects the model memories with non-volatile EEPROM memory (which does not require periodic replacement) and not a battery, the transmitter still should have regular checkups for wear and tear. We recommend sending your system to the Futaba Service Center DQQXDOO\GXULQJ\RXUQRQÀ\LQJVHDVRQIRUDFRPSOHWHFKHFNXSDQ GVHUYLFH NiCd Battery Charge the batteries! (See Charging the NiCd batteries, p. 15, for details.) Always recharge the transmitter and UHFHLYHUEDWWHULHV IRUDWOHDVWKRXUVEHIRUHHDFKÀ\LQJVHVVL RQ$ORZEDWWHU\ZLOOVRRQGLHSRWHQWLDOO\FDXVLQJ ORVVRIFRQWURODQGDFUDVK:KHQ\RXEHJLQ\RXUÀ\LQJVHVVLRQ UHVHW\RXU&*¶VEXLOWLQWLPHUDQGGXULQJWKH session pay attention to the duration of usage. Stop flying long before your batteries become low on charge. Do not rely on your radio’s low battery warning systems, intended only as a precaution, to tell you when to recharge. Always check your transmitter DQGUHFHLYHUEDWWHULHVSULRUWRHDFKÀLJKW Where to Fly :HUHFRPPHQGWKDW\RXÀ\DWDUHFRJQL]HGPRGHODLUSODQHÀ\LQJ¿ HOG<RXFDQ¿QGPRGHOFOXEVDQG¿HOGVE\DVNLQJ your nearest hobby dealer, or in the US by contacting the Academy of Model Aeronautics. You can also contact the national Academy of Model Aeronautics (AMA), which has more than 2,500 chartered clubs across the country. Through any one of them, instructor training programs and insured newcomer training are available. Contact the AMA at the address or toll-free phone number below. Academy of Model Aeronautics 5161 East Memorial Drive Muncie, IN 47302 Tele. (800) 435-9262 Fax (765) 289-4248 or via the Internet at http:\\www.modelaircraft.org  $OZD\VSD\SDUWLFXODUDWWHQWLRQWRWKHÀ\LQJ¿HOG¶VUXOHV as well as the presence and location of spectators, the

ZLQGGLUHFWLRQDQGDQ\REVWDFOHVRQWKH¿HOG%HYHU\FDUHIXO À\LQJLQDUHDVQHDUSRZHUOLQHVWDOOEXLOGLQJVRU communication facilities as there may be radio interference in their vicinity. ,I\RXPXVWÀ\DZD\IURPDFOXE¿HOGEHVXUHWKHUHDUHQRRWKH UPRGHOHUVÀ\LQJZLWKLQD WKUHHWR¿YHPLOHUDQJH , or you may lose control of your aircraft or cause someone else to lose control.6 $WWKHÀ\LQJ¿HOG To prevent possible damage to your radio gear, turn the power switches on and off in the proper sequence: 3XOOWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\R XUPRWRUHQJLQH 2. Turn on the transmitter power and allow your transmitter to reach its home screen. &RQ¿UPWKHSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KDVEHHQVHOHFWHG 4. Turn on your receiver power. 7HVWDOOFRQWUROV,IDVHUYRRSHUDWHVDEQRUPDOO\GRQ¶WDWW HPSWWRÀ\XQWLO\RXGHWHUPLQHWKHFDXVHRIWKHSUREOHP

7HVWWRHQVXUHWKDWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJVDUHFRUUHFWDIWHUDGM XVWLQJWKHQWXUQLQJWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIDQGFRQ¿UPLQJWKH SURSHUVXUIDFHWKURWWOHPRYHPHQWV7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUEDFNRQ  6. Start your engine. 7. Complete a full range check (see p. 22). $IWHUÀ\LQJEULQJ\RXUWKURWWOHVWLFNWRLGOHSRVLWLRQHQJ DJHDQ\NLOOVZLWFKHVRURWKHUZLVHGLVDUP\RXUPRWRUHQJLQH 9. Turn off receiver power. 10. Turn off transmitter power. ,I\RXGRQRWWXUQRQ\RXUV\VWHPLQWKLVRUGHU\RXPD\GDPDJH \RXUVHUYRVRUFRQWUROVXUIDFHVÀRRG\RXUHQJLQHRU in the case of electric-powered or gasoline-powered models, the engine may unexpectedly turn on and cause a severe injury.  :KLOH\RXDUHJHWWLQJUHDG\WRÀ\LI\RXSODFH\RXUWUDQVPLWW HURQWKHJURXQGEHVXUHWKDWWKHZLQGZRQ
W

tip it over. If it is knocked over, the throttle stick may be accidentally moved, causing the engine to speed up. Also, damage to your transmitter may occur. In order to maintain complete control of your aircraft it is important that it remains visible at all times . Flying behind large objects such as buildings, grain bins, etc. is not suggested. Doing so may result in the reduction of the quality of the radio frequency link to the model. 'RQRWJUDVSWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQDGXULQJÀLJKW Doing so may degrade the quality of the radio frequency transmission. As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is from the sides of the WUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQD$VVXFKWKHDQWHQQDVKRXOGQRWEHSRLQWHGGLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXUÀ\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHV this situation, easily move the antenna to correct this situation.  'RQ¶W À\LQ WKH UDLQ Water or moisture may enter the transmitter through the antenna or stick openings and

FDXVHHUUDWLFRSHUDWLRQRUORVVRIFRQWURO ,I\RXPXVWÀ\LQZ HWZHDWKHUGXULQJDFRQWHVWEHVXUHWRFRYHU\RXU WUDQVPLWWHUZLWKDSODVWLFEDJRUZDWHUSURRIEDUULHU1HYHUÀ\ LIOLJKWQLQJLVH[SHFWHG7 A QUICK INTRODUCTION TO THE 10CG SYSTEM

TRANSMITTER: • Large graphic liquid-crystal display panel with two buttons, a cursor lever and an easy set up turn-and-press dial for quick, easy setup. • All transmitters include all three aircraft types with specialized programming for each, including: • Airplane (ACRO ) • V-TAIL• Twin Aileron Servos ( FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF ) • Gyro Mixing • ELEVON • Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR ) • AIRBRAKE • Snap Roll (4 separate directions available) • Helicopter (8 swashplate types, including CCPM, see page 93)( HELI ) • 3 Idle Ups • Throttle and Pitch Curves per Condition • Revo. Mixing • Gyro Mixing including Separate Settings per Condition • Delay • Governor Mixing  6DLOSODQH*OLGHUZLQJW\SHV GLID 1AIL+1FLP2AIL+1FLP2AIL+2FLP ) • V-TAIL• Twin Ailerons ( FLAPERON and AIL-DIFF  )OLJKW&RQGLWLRQV1RUPDO6WDUW • ELEVON • Crow ( BUTTERFLY     6SHHG'LVWDQFH/DQGLQJ • OFFSET(5 conditions)

• BASIC menu for quick, easy set up of less complex models.

• ADVANCEmenu for more complex, unique setups. • Four electronic TRIM LEVERS for rapid yet precise trim adjustment - no remembering to “store trims” between models and no more “bumped trims” during transport.

• IDLE- DOWN (ACRO ), THR-CUT(ACRO  HELI ) (engine shut off), and MOTOR CUT( GLID VHWXSVWRDOORZSUHFLVHHQJLQHPRWRU

control for taxi and landings. • 15 complete model memories with 33 more per optional CAMPac (128K). • New stick design with improved feel, adjustable length and tension. • Triple rates available by setting dual rates to 3-position switches. • Eight SWITCHES, three DIALS and two SLIDERS ; completely assignable in most applications. • Trainer system includes the “functional” ( FUNC ) setting, which allows the student to use the 10CG’s mixing, helicopter,

and other programming functions even with a 4-channel buddy box. (Optional trainer cord required.) • 10CG transmitter transmits in both 2.4G-7CH and 2.4G-10CH by selecting modulation and then cycling the transmitter

power. Requires receiver of proper modulation. • Permanent memory storage via EEPROM with no backup battery to service or have fail. • 10CAG transmitter features airplane friendly switch layout, w ith the trainer switch at the left hand (Mode 2), and a

notched throttle to minimize throttle changes with rudder input. Defaults to ACRO model type. • 10CHG transmitter features helicopter-friendly switch layout, with idle-up and throttle hold switches at the left hand, and

a smooth, ratchet-less (unsprung) throttle for perfect hovering. Defaults to HELI ( H-1 swashplate type) model type. • Change transmitter mode from mode 2 to modes 1, 3, or 4. (See P. 17) Note that in the text of this manual, beginning at this point, any time we are using a feature’s specialized name or abbreviation as seen on the screen of the 10CG, that name, feature, or abbreviation will be exactly as seen on the radio’s screen, including capitalization and shown in a DIFFERENT TYPE STYLEIRUFODULW\$Q\WLPHZHPHQWLRQDVSHFL¿FFRQWURO on the radio itself, such as moving SWITCH A , KNOB VR(B) , or the THROTTLE STICK , those words will be displayed as they are here.8 RE C EIVER: R6014H S/R6008H S • T h ese mo d e l s h ave two ( 2 ) operat i on mo d es as s h own b e l ow.

N ormal mode/H ig h S peed mode Th e "Norma lmo d e" accepts anytype of servos or th e perip h era l s as th e frame rate of th e output i s 14ms. T h e "H igh S pee d mo d e" on l y accept th e di g i ta lservos for outputs from 1c hto 6c h , i nc l u di ng BLS ser i es, an d most per i p h era l equ ipments suc has th e gyros or b rus hl ess ESCs. T h e frame rate of th e outputs i s 7ms. T he outputs for other channels indicated below allow to use anytype of servos as the frame rate of these outputs are still 1 4ms on th e H ighSpee d mo d e . R 6008HS - 7c han d 8c h R 6014H S - 7c hto 1 2 ch , DG1, D G 2

R6014H S R6008H S

• Futab a FA SS T- 2 .4G R6014HS,R6014FS, R6008HS or R608FS rece i ver may b e use d w i thth e 10CG at 2.4 G -10ch m ode. Futab a FA SS T
- 2
. 4G R607FS, R617FS, R616FFM or R6004FF rece i ver may b e use d w i thth e 10CG at 2 .4 G -7ch mode. T 10CG 2.4G system and receive r compatibility T ra n s m i tt er Recei ve r **R606F S**  **R6004FF ,** **R616FFM ,**  **R 607F**  **S , R617F**  **S R608F**  **S, R6008H**  **S, R6014F**  **S , R6014H**  **S T10CG 2.4G System**  **1 0c**  **h mo**  **d e**  **— —**  **O kay**  **7 c**  **h mo**  **de O**  **ka**

**y O**  **ka**

**y —** 

S ER VOS 3 O HDVHVHHWHF KQ L FD OVSHF L¿ FDW L RQVSD J HIRUVSHF L¿ FVRQWK HVHUYRV 7KHLQFOXGHGUHFHLYHULVFRPSDWLEOHZLWKDOO-SOX J)XWDEDVHUYRVLQFOXGLQ JUHWUDFWZLQFKDQGGL J LWDOVHUYRV

9 CONTENTS AND TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS 6SHFL¿FDWLRQVDQGUDWLQJVDUHVXEMHFWWRFKDQJHZLWKRXWQRWLFH  Your 10CAG, 10CHG or 10CG system includes the following components:

• T10CAG, T10CHG or T10CG Transmitter

• R6008HS or R6014HS Receiver • N 55%&+*RQO\RU15-&$*RQO\1L&GEDWWHU\

& Charger • Switch harness • Aileron extension cord • Neck strap * The set contents depend on the type of set. Transmitter T10CAG/HG/G (2-stick, 10-channel, FASST-2.4G system) Transmitting frequency: 2.4GHz band Modulation: 2.4G-7ch or 2.4G-10ch, switchable Power supply: 9.6V NT8S700B Ni-Cd battery Receiver R6008HS/R6014HS (Dual antenna diversity) Power requirement: 4.8V or 6.0V battery or regulated output from ESC, etc. (*1) 6L]H 5+6[[LQ[[PP R6014HS: 2.06 x 1.48 x 0.63 in. (52.3 x 37.5 x 16.0 mm) :HLJKW5 +6R]J5+6R]J (*1) Be sure that when using ESC's regulated output the capacity of the ESC must meet your usage condition. Usage condition on "High Speed mode" (R6008HS/R6014HS) CAUTION When using the R6008HS/R6014HS in the high speed (HS) mode, digital servos are required for WKH¿UVWVL[FKDQQHOV ,IDQDQDORJVHUYRLVFRQQHFWHGWRRQHRIWKH¿UVWVL[ channels when in the high speed mode, the servo will not function properly. Additionally, while many peripheral devices will operate in either the high speed or normal mode, some will not. If there are any difficulties noted, please return the reciver's operational mode to the "Normal" mode to determine LIWKLVUHVROYHVWKHGLI¿FXOW\ If using the R6008HS in the high speed mode, analog servos may be used for channels seven and eight. If using the R6014HS in the high speed mode, analog servos may be used for channels seven to 12 and for DG1 and DG2. (For Operation Mode Selection, see p.20) (Suggested Servo for use with your 10CG system) Servo S9252 (Digital servo) Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver) Output torque: 91.7 oz.-in. (6.6 kg-cm) at 4.8V 2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9 Size: 1.57 x 0.79 x 1.44 in. (40 x 20 x 36.6 mm) Weight: 1.76 oz. (50 g) Servo S9255 (Digital servo) Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver) Output torque: 125.0 oz.-in. (9.0 kg-cm) at 4.8V 2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9 Size: 1.57 x 0.79 x 1.44 in. (40 x 20 x 36.6 mm) Weight: 1.94 oz. (55 g) Servo S3151 (Standard, Digital servo) Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral Power requirement: 4.8 V (from receiver) Output torque: 43.1 oz.-in. (3.1 kg-cm) at 4.8V 2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHFDW9 Size: 1.59 x 0.79 x 1.42 in. (40.5 x 20 x 36.1 mm) Weight: 1.48 oz. (42 g) Servo S3001 (Standard, ball-bearing) Control system: Pulse width control, 1.52 ms neutral Power requirement: 4.8 - 6.0V (from receiver) Output torque: 41.7 oz.-in. (3.0 kg-cm) 2SHUDWLQJVSHHGVHF Size: 1.59 x 0.78 x 1.41 in. (40.4 x 19.8 x 36 mm) Weight: 1.59 oz. (45.1g)10 The following additional accessories are available from your dealer. Refer to a Futaba catalog for more information:

• CAMPacMemory module - the optional DP-128K CAMPacincreases your model storage capability (to 48 models IURPDQGDOORZV\RXWRWUDQVIHUSURJUDPVWRDQRWKHU&* &WUDQVPLWWHU1RWHWKDWGDWDFDQQRWEHWUDQVIHUUHGWR from any other model of transmitter (i.e. 8U, 9Z, etc). However, CAMPac ZKLFK VDYHGWKH GDWD RI7&7&6WUDQVPLWWHULV FRQYHUWLEOH IR UWKH GDWD RIWKLV &*& transmitter. See p.17 for the conversion method. Insertion of a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type (ex: 9Z) will result in a complete CAMPac data reset and loss of all data. • NT8S Transmitter battery pack - the (700mAh) transmitter Ni-Cd battery pack may be easily exchanged with a fresh one WRSURYLGHHQRXJKFDSDFLW\IRUH[WHQGHGÀ\LQJVHVVLRQV 7UDLQHUFRUGWKHRSWLRQDOWUDLQHUFRUGPD\EHXVHGWRKHOS DEHJLQQLQJSLORWOHDUQWRÀ\HDVLO\E\SODFLQJWKHLQVWUXFWRU on a separate transmitter. Note that the 10CG transmitter may be connected to another 10CG system, as well as to many other models of Futaba transmitters. The 10CG transmitter uses the newer micro plug (rectangular type) cord plug. Both new-to-new and new-to-round plug style trainer cords are available. 1HFNVWUDSDQHFNVWUDSPD\EHFRQQHFWHGWR\RXU7&*V\VWHPWRPDNHLWHDVLHUWRKDQGOHDQGLPSURYH\RXUÀ\LQJ precision, since your hands won’t need to support the transmitter’s weight. • Y-harnesses, servo extensions, etc - Genuine Futaba extensions and Y-harnesses, including a heavy-duty version with heavier wire, are available to aid in your larger model and other installations. FHOO9UHFHLYHUEDWWHU\SDFNV$OO)XWDEDDLUERUQHHTXLSPHQWH[FHSWWKDWZKLFKLVVSHFL¿FDOO\ODEHOHGRWKHUZLVH is designed to work with 4.8V (Ni-Cd 4 cells) or 6.0V (Ni-Cd 5 cells or alkaline 4 cells). Using a 6.0V pack increases the FXUUHQWÀRZWRWKHVHUYRVZKLFK DFFHOHUDWHVWKHLUUDWHRIUHVS RQVHDQGWKHLUWRUTXH+RZHYHU EHFDXVHRIWKLVIDVWHUFXUUHQW GUDZDFHOOEDWWHU\SDFNRIWKHVDPHP$KUDWLQJZLOOODVWDS SUR[LPDWHO\WKHWLPHRIDFHOOSDFN • Gyros - a variety of genuine Futaba gyros are available for your aircraft or helicopter needs. See p.73 for aircraft or p. 107 for helicopter gyro information. • Governor (GV1) - for helicopter use. Automatically adjusts throttle servo position to maintain a constant head speed regardless of blade pitch, load, weather, etc. See p. 108 for details. • Receivers - various models of receivers may be purchased for use in other models. (See p. 8.)11 7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD&$*0RG HV\VWHPDVVXSSOLHGE\WKHIDFWRU\ You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C to create triple rates. See p. 42 for details.) * Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated. ** RF LED is blue when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly. CAM Pac or Dust Cap 

## TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - AIRPLANE

SW(B) VR(A) VR(B)

SW(A) SW(F) SW(E)

VR(D) VR(E) VR(C)

SW(G) SW(H) SW(D) SW(C) CH8 Knob This controls CH6, and if flaperon mixing is activated controls the flap. Flap Trim Control

Rudder Dual Rate Switch / CH9 Elevator Dual Rate Snap Roll or Trainer Switch Landing Gear Switch /CH5

Rudder /Throttle

Stick Power LED* Throttle Trim Lever

Rudder Trim Lever

LCD Panel Power Switch (Up position: ON) Hook (for optional neckstrap) MODE Key

END Key Cursor Lever Aileron Trim Lever

Dial Elevator Trim Lever Elevator /Aileron

Stick Aileron Dual Rate Switch Elevator - Flap Mixing or Airbrake Mixing Switch Spoiler/CH7 Control This knob is disabled if aileron differential is activated. Carrying Handle Antenna

LED** RF Switch / CH1012 7KLV¿JXUHVKRZVWKHGHIDXOWVZLWFKDVVLJQPHQWVIRUD&+*0RG HV\VWHPDVVXSSOLHGE\WKHIDFWRU\ You can change many of the switch positions or functions by selecting a new position within the setting menu for the function you wish to move. (Example: move aileron dual rates to switch C to create triple rates. See p. 42 for details.) * Power LED blinks to indicate if any mix switches are activated. ** RF LED is blue when the transmission link is solid and the radio is transmitting properly. CAM Pac or Dust Cap 

## TRANSMITTER CONTROLS - HELI

SW(B) VR(A) VR(B)

SW(A) SW(F) SW(E)

VR(D) VR(E) VR(C)

SW(G) SW(H) SW(D) SW(C) CH8 Knob Hovering - Pitch Knob

Rudder Dual Rate Switch/CH9 Elevator Dual Rate Switch/CH10 Idle-up 3 Switch Idle-up 1&2 Switch

Throttle/Collective Pitch & Rudder Stick

Throttle/Collective Trim Lever Power LED*

Rudder Trim Lever

LCD Panel
Power Switch (Up position: ON) Hook (for optional neckstrap) Aileron Trim Lever

Dial Elevator Trim Lever Elevator /Aileron

Stick Aileron Dual Rate Switch

Throttle - Hold Switch

Trainer Switch Governor Switch Hovering - Throttle Knob/CH7 Carrying Handle

LED** RF Antenna

MODE Key

END Key Cursor Lever High-pitch Lever13 NOTE: If you need to remove or replace the transmitter battery, do not pull on its wires to remove it. Instead, gently pull on the FRQQHFWRU
V SODVWLF KRXVLQJ ZKHUHLW SOXJVLQWR the transmitter. Battery connector location Charging jack Trainer function connector

Battery cover NT8S Ni-Cd battery pack

SWITCH ASSIGNMENT TABLE • The factory default functions activated by the switches and knobs for a 10CAG Mode 2 transmitter are shown below. • Most 10CG functions may be reassigned to non-default positions quickly and easily. • Basic control assignments of channels 5-10 are quickly adjustable in AUX-CH (see p. 46). For example, the channel 5 servo, which defaults to SWITCH E for retract use, can easily be unassigned (NULL) to allow for easy use as a second rudder servo in a mix, or to a slider or dial for bomb door or other control. • Note that most functions need to be activated in the programming to operate. • 10CAG Mode 1, 10CHG, and 10CG transmitter functions are similar but reverse certain switch commands. Always check that you have the desired switch assignment for each function during set up. Switch/Knob A or H Airplane (ACRO ) Sailplane/Glider ( GLID ) Helicopter ( HELI ) SWITCH A elevator dual rate ch10 elevator dual rate GRZQ EXWWHUÀ\RQ ch10 elevator dual rate ch10 SWITCH B rudder dual rate ch9 rudder dual rate ch9 rudder dual rate ch9 SWITCH C up = ELE-FLPon FHQWHUGRZQ  IDLE-DOWN down = AIRBRAKEon up = ELE-FLPon center = Distance cond. down = Landing cond. governor
SWITCH D aileron dual rate aileron dual rate aileron dual rate SWITCH E or G* ODQGLQJJHDUFK WKURWWOHKROGFK SWITCH F or H* VQDSUROOWUDLQHU trainer WUDLQHUTHR-CUT SWITCH G or E* none up = Speed cond. down = Start cond. idle-up 1 and 2 SWITCH H or F* none LGOHXSJ\UR KNOB A ÀDSFK ÀDSWULPLI FLAPERON on) ÀDS ch6 HOVERING PITCH KNOB B ch 8 ch 8 ch 8 KNOB C VSRLOHUFK (disabled if AIL-DIFFon) ch 7 (disabled if AIL-DIFon) HOVERING THROTTLE ch7 SLIDER D none ch 5 none SLIDER E none none HI-PIT *On the 10CAG Mode 2 transmitters, the TOP LEFT SWITCHES are spring-loaded and 2-position; on the 10CAG Mode 1, 10CHG, and 10CG, those switches are on the right side. For consistency, the switch position’s designation remains the same (upper left is F, etc ), but the functions are moved to match the switch type.14 RECEIVER AND SERVO CONNECTIONS Receiver Output and

Channel Aircraft (ACRO ) 1 DLOHURQVDLOHURQ 1 FRPELQHGÀDS	DLOHURQ 2 2 elevator 3 throttle 4 rudder 5 VSDUHODQGLQJJHDUDLOHURQ 1,3 FRPELQHGÀDSDQGDLOHURQ 2,3 6 VSDUHÀDSVFRPELQHGÀDSDQGDLOHURQ 2 7 VSDUHDLOHURQ 1 8 VSDUHHOHYDWRU 4PL[WXUHFRQWURO 9 spare 10 spare 1 Aileron Differential mode (AILE-DIFF ). (See p. 54). 2 Flaperon mode. (See p. 52). 3 Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6. ( AILE-2 ) (See

p. 55) 4 AILEVATOR (dual elevator) mode. (See p. 57). Receiver Output and

Channel Sailplane/Glider ( GLID ) GLID (1A+1F) GLID (2A+1F) (AILE-DIFF) GLID (2A+2F) (AILE-DIFF) ELEVON FLAPERON 1 combined elevator-2 & aileron-1 c o m b i n e d f l a p - 2 & aileron-1 aileron-1 aileron-1 2 combined elevator-1 & aileron-2 H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-2 & elevator-1 2 H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-2 & elevator-1 2 H O H Y D W R U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-2 & elevator-1 2 3 VSDUHPRWRU V SDUHPRWRUFRPELQHG ÀDS	DLOHURQ 3 VSDUHPRWRU VSDUHPRWRUVSRLOHU 1 4 rudder U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-1 & elevator-2 2 U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-1 & elevator-2 2 U X G G H U  F R P E L Q H G rudder-1 & elevator-2 2 5 VSDUHVSRLOHU 1 VSDUHVSRLOHU 1 FRPELQHG ÀDS	DLOHURQ 3 VSDUHVSRLOHU 1 ÀDS 6 ÀDSV c o m b i n e d f l a p - 1 & aileron-2 ÀDSV ÀDS 7 spare spare aileron-2 aileron-2 8 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU 1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU 1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU 1 VSDUHVSRLOHUVVSRLOHU 1 9 spare spare spare spare 10 spare spare spare spare 1 2-servo spoiler mode ( SPOILER ). (See p. 83). 2 V-tail mixing mode. (See p. 58). 3 Using Second Aileron option, second aileron servo output is sent to channels 5 and 6

and channels 3 and 6. ( AILE-2 ) (See p. 55) **ACRO (FLAPERON)** 

AIL1 2 FLP2 2 (CH1) AIL2 2 FLP1 2 (CH6)
AIL (CH1)
AIL1 1 (CH1) FLP (CH6) **ACRO (w/FLAP)** 

AIL2 1 (CH7) (Wing Type)

**(V-TAIL)**

ELE1 RUD2 ( CH2 ) ELE2 RUD1 (CH4) **(NORMAL)**

ELE (CH2) **(AILVATOR)**

ELE1 AIL3 (CH2) ELE2 AIL4 (CH8) (Tail Type)

AIL1 ELE2 (CH1) **GLID(1A+1F)**

**(ELEVON)**

AIL2 ELE1 (CH2) **GLID(1A+1F) (FLAPERON)** 

AIL1 FLP2 (CH1) AIL2 FLP1 (CH6) AIL1 (CH1) FLP1 (CH6) FLP2 (CH5) AIL2 (CH7) **GLID(2A+2F)**

AIL1 (CH1) AIL2 (CH7) FLP (CH6) **GLID(2A+1F)** (Wing Type) **(V-TAIL)**

ELE1 RUD2 ( CH2 ) ELE2 RUD1 (CH4) **(NORMAL)**

ELE (CH2) (Tail Type)15 The initial charge, and any charge after a complete discharge, should be at least 18 hours to ensure full charge. The batteries should be left RQ FKDUJH IRU DERXW  KRXUV ZKHQ UHFKDUJLQJWKH VWDQGDUG 15-  NR4F1500 and NT8S700B Ni-Cd batteries. We recommend charging the batteries with the charger supplied with your system. Note that the use of a fast charger may damage the batteries by overheating and dramatically reduce their lifetime.

You should fully discharge your system’s NiCd batteries periodically to prevent a condition called "memory". )RUH[DPSOHLI\RXRQO\PDNHWZRÀLJKWVHDFKVHVVLRQRU\RXU HJXODUO\XVHRQO\DVPDOODPRXQWRIWKHEDWWHULHV capacity, the memory effect can reduce the actual capacity even if the battery is fully charged. You can cycle your batteries with a commercial cycling unit*, or by leaving the system on and exercising the servos by moving the transmitter sticks until the transmitter shuts itself off. Cycling should be done every four to eight weeks, even during the winter or periods of long storage. Keep track of the batteries capacity during cycling; if there is a noticeable change, you may need to replace the batteries. *Note that the 10CG transmitter system has electronic protection from overcharging and reverse polarity via a poli-switch. It d oes NOT have a GLRGHLQWKHFKDUJHFLUFXLWDQGPD\EHGLVFKDUJHGSHDNFKDUJHG ZLWKWKHEDWWHU\LQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU DO NOT attempt to charge your 8-cell transmitter pack on the 4-cell receiver plug of the wall charger! CHARGING THE NiCd BATTERIES Charging Your System’s Batteries 1. Connect the transmitter charging jack and airborne NiCd batteries to the transmitter and receiver connectors of the charger. 2. Plug the charger into a wall socket. 3. Check that the charger LED lights. Receiver Output and

Channel Helicopter ( HELI ) 1 aileron (cyclic roll) 2 elevator (cyclic pitch) 3 throttle 4 rudder 5 VSDUHJ\UR 6 pitch (collective pitch) 7 VSDUHJRYHUQRU 8 VSDUHPL[WXUHFRQWURO 9 spare 10 spare (Swash Type)
**HR3 H-1 H-3** 

ELE ELE

ELE1

ELE2 120 ̊
120 ̊ 120 ̊ PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT) PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT)

**HN3**
120 ̊

120 ̊ 120 ̊ ELE

PIT AIL **HE3**

ELE PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT)

PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT) **H-2**

PIT FRONT

AIL **H-4** ELE1

ELE2 AIL PIT **H4X** (Normal l i nkage type) **H-1** :each servo l i nked to the swashplate i ndependently.

Charger

TX: Transmitter charging indicato r RX: Receiver charging indicator To transmitter charging jack Receiver Ni-Cd battery16 Adjusting the length of the non-slip control sticks

<RXPD\DGMXVWWKHWHQVLRQRI\RXUVWLFNVWRSURYLGHWKHIHHOWKDW\RXSUHIHUIRUÀ\LQJ7RDGMXVW\RXUVSULQJV\RX¶OOKDYH to remove the rear case of the transmitter. First, remove the battery cover on the rear of the transmitter. Next, unplug the battery wire, and remove the battery from the transmitter. Next, using a screwdriver, remove the four screws that hold the transmitter’s rear cover in position, and put them in a safe place. Gently ease off the transmitter’s rear cover. Now you’ll VHHWKHYLHZVKRZQLQWKH¿JXUHDERYH Using a small Phillips screwdriver, rotate the adjusting screw for each stick for the desired spring tension. The tension increases when the adjusting screw is turned clockwise. :KHQ\RXDUHVDWLV¿HGZLWKWKHVSULQJWHQVLRQVUHDWWDFKWKHWU DQVPLWWHU
VUHDUFRYHU:KHQWKHFRYHULVSURSHUO\LQSODFH reinstall and tighten the four screws. Reinstall the battery and cover. Adjusting Display Contrast: To adjust the display contrast, from the home menu press and hold the END BUTTON
. Turn the DIAL while still holding the END BUTTON: clockwise to brighten counterclockwise to darken the display Let go off the DIAL and the END BUTTON
. You may change the length of the control sticks to make your transmitter more comfortable to hold and operate. To lengthen or shorten your transmitter’s VWLFNV¿UVWXQORFNWKHVWLFNWLSE\KROGLQJORFNLQJSLHFH%DQ GWXUQLQJVWLFNWLS A counterclockwise. Next, move the locking piece B up or down (to lengthen or shorten). When the length feels comfortable, lock the position by turning locking piece B counterclockwise. 

### Stick tip A Locking piece B

Stick lever tension adjustment

Mode 2 transmitter with rear cover removed. Aileron Elevator

Rudde r Stick Stick17 Changing Modes (TX SETTING ): Hold down MODE and END keys while turning on the transmitter to enter the TX SETTING menu. Stick Mode : The screen reads " STK-MODE ". Use the DIAL to change this to the correct mode. Note that this will NOT change the throttle and elevator rachets, etc. Those are mechanical changes that must be done by a service center. Throttle Reverse : THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to the stick’s upper half. To use THR-REV , CURSOR DOWN to THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV . Turn the transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the radio. ( GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set. (See p.33) Display language : can be selected the display language of the function name, etc. in each function menu. The screen reads " LANGUAGE ". Change this to the desired language. Area Selection (Frequency Range) : The T10CG transmitter has been designed to function in many countries. If you will be utilizing this transmitter in a country other than France, please make sure that TM10-MODEis set to " GENERAL ". If, however, this transmitter will be utilized in France, it must be set to " FRANCE ". Power Down mode (TM10 POWER MODE ): We have installed a special "Power Down Mode" for doing a ground range check. Hold down DIAL while turning on the transmitter to call TM10 POWER MODEmenu.

Power Down Mode : To activate the "Power Down Mode" press DIAL and the home screen will appear. During this mode, the RF power is reduced so the range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode is activated the blue LED on the front of the transmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warning with a beep sound every 3 seconds. The "Power Down Mode" continues for 90 seconds and after that the power will return to the normal level. To exit the "Power Down Mode" before the 90 seconds, press DIAL again. This mode is available one time only so if you need to reuse this function the transmitter power must be cycled and the "Power Down Mode" reset. NEVER VWDUWÀ\LQJZKHQWKH "Power Down Mode" is active. Power Off Mode : To use the RF power off mode, CURSOR DOWN to OFFand press DIAL . During this mode, the RF power is turned off. The blue LED on the front of the transmitter is turned off. CAMPac Initializing Method and Data Conversion (T9C/T9CS to T10CG): Insertion of a new CAMPac or a CAMPac containing data of a different transmitter type will open EXT-MEMORY menu after turning the transmitter on.
To initialize the CAMPac, CURSOR DOWN to "Yes" and press DIAL and the check display of "OK?" will appear. Press DIAL again, the initializing of the CAMPac will start. 7RFRQYHUWWKH&$03DFGDWDIURP7&7&6WR7&*VHOHFWWR1 RE\ CURSOR lever and then press DIAL and the home screen will appear. See p.30 for the conversion method.18 RADIO INSTALLATION Follow these guidelines to properly mount the servos, receiver and battery. • Make certain the alignment tab on the battery, switch and servo connectors is oriented correctly and “keys” into the

corresponding notch in the receiver or connectors before plugging them in. When unplugging connectors, never pull on the wires. Always pull on the plastic connector instead. • If your aileron servo (or others) are too far away to plug into the receiver, use an aileron extension cord to extend the

length of the servo lead. Additional Futaba extension cords of varying lengths are available from your hobby dealer. Always use an extension of the proper length. Avoid plugging multiple extensions together to attain your desired length. If distance is greater than 18” or multiple or high current draw servos are being used, use Futaba Heavy-Duty servo extensions.
**Servo** Rubber grommet **Servo** Rubber grommet • Always mount the servos with the supplied rubber grommets . Do not over

tighten the screws. No part of the servo casing should contact the mounting UDLOVVHUYRWUD\RUDQ\RWKHUSDUWRIWKHDLUSODQHKHOLFRSWHU VWUXFWXUH2WKHUZLVH YLEUDWLRQZLOOEHWUDQVPLWWHGWRWKHVHUYRFDXVLQJSUHPDWXUHZH DUDQGRUVHUYR failure. • Note the small numbers (1, 2, 3, 4) molded into each arm on the Futaba 4-arm servo arms. The numbers

indicate how many degrees each arm is “off” from 90 degrees to correct for minute manufacturing deviations from servo to servo.
• To center the servos, connect them to the receiver and turn on the transmitter

and receiver. Center the trims on the transmitter, then find the arm that will be perpendicular to the pushrod when placed on the servo.
• After the servos are installed, operate each servo over its full travel and check that the pushrods and servo arms do not

bind or contact each other. Also make sure the controls do not require excess force to operate. If there is an objectionable buzzing sound coming from a servo, there is probably too much resistance in the control. Find and correct the problem. Even if there is no servo damage, excess battery drain will result. • Use the mounting plateIURPWKHUHFHLYHURQRIIVZLWFKDVDWHPSODWHIRUWKHFXWRXWDQGVFUHZKROHV0RXQWWKHVZLWFK

on the side of the fuselage opposite the engine exhaust, and where it won’ t be inadvertently turned on or off during handling or storage. Be certain the switch moves without restriction and “snaps” from ON to OFF, and that the cutout allows full motion of the switch in both directions. • When you install the switch harness to the helicopter, please use the switch cover. Generally sandwich the frame between

the switch and switch cover and securely tighten the screws. Different models might require different installations. If so, please follow the model's instruction manual.

Fasten about 5-10cm from the servo outlet so that the lead w i re i s neat.

Slack i n the lead w i re. • To prevent the servo lead wires from being broken by vibration during

ÀLJKWSURYLGHDVOLJKWDPRXQWRIVODFNRUH[WUDVRWKDWWKHZL UHVWLFNVRXW slightly and fasten it at suitable points. In addition, periodically check the wire during daily maintenance.19 IMPORTANT : Since the 2.4GHz have different characteristics than that of the conventional 27MHz and 72MHz frequencies, please read this section carefully to maximize your enjoyment of the 2.4GHz system.
5HFHLYHU
V$QWHQQD,QVWDOODWLRQ

Antenna *Must be kept as stra i ght as poss i ble. Coax i al cable

R6014HS Receiver <RXZLOOQRWHWKDWWKH5+65+6GLIIHUVLQDSSHDUDQFH

from the standard Futaba receiver. These receivers incorporate two separate antennas into their design which enables them to receive the radio frequency transmission at two different locations. Futaba's dual antenna diversity then seamlessly selects the best signal reception between these antennas to ensure that there is no loss of signal. • To obtain the best results of the diversity function, please refer to the following instructions: 1. The two antennas must be kept as straight as possible. Otherwise it will reduce

the effective range. 2. The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other.  7KLVLVQRWDFULWLFDO¿JXUHEXWWKHPRVWLPSRUWDQWWKLQJLV WRNHHSWKHDQWHQQDV

away from each other as much as possible. Larger models can have large metal objects that can attenuate the RF signal.In this case the antennas should be placed at both sides of the model. Then the best 5)VLJQDOFRQGLWLRQLVREWDLQHGDWDQ\À\LQJDWWLWXGH 3. The antennas must be kept awayfrom conductive materials, such as metal,

carbon and fuel tank by at least a half inch. The coaxial part of the antennas does not need to follow these guidelines, but do not bend it in a tight radius. 4. Keep the antennas away from the motor, ESC, and other noise sources as much as possible.



### Antenna Antenna *The two antennas should be placed at 90 degrees to each other. *The main purpose of the photo demonstrates how the antenna should be placed. 5HFHLYHU9LEUDWLRQDQG:DWHUSURR¿QJ7KHUHFHLYHUFRQWDLQVSU HFLVLRQHOHFWURQLFSDUWV%HVXUHWRDYRLGYLEUDWLRQVKRFN

and temperature extremes. For protection, wrap the receiver in foam rubber or other vibration-absorbing materials. It is also a good idea to waterproof the receiver by placing it in a plastic bag and securing the open end of the bag with a rubber band before wrapping it with foam rubber. If you accidentally get moisture or fuel inside the receiver, you may experience intermittent operation or a crash. If in doubt, return the receiver to our service center for service.2 0 Operat i on Mode S elect ( R6008H S/R6014H S):

R6014H S R6008H S
LED Link / Mod e S witc h LED Link / Mod e S witc h

Th e operat i on mo d e i s on "Norma lmo d e" from factorys hipp i n g . To c h an g e th e mo d e, p l ease a dh ere to th e fo ll ow i n g s tep s:

0 to 1 sec. More than 1 sec. 0 sec. 1 sec. **Press and Hold time Turn on the receiver**  **.**

No funct i on Show i ng the CURRENT mode w i th bl i nk. **Red Blink** = Normal **Green/Red Blink** = H i gh Speed Sol i d as the mode changed. **Red Solid** = Normal **Green/Red Solid** = H i gh Speed (Become **Red** after one (1) second) 㧔 Funct i on 㧕 To change the mode between Normal and H i gh Speed

㧔 LED Status 㧕 1. T urn o ff th e r ece i ve r. 2
. Pr ess an d hold the L ink / Mod e sw i tc han d turn on th e rece i ver. K eep holdin gthe switch for more than one(1) second. The LED EHJLQVÀDVKLQJWRLQGLFDWHWKHFXUUHQWVWDWXV 3. R ele a se the swi t ch. 4 . Turn off the receiver. B y doing so, the receiver will change modes. P lease check the operation mode by observing the LED when turning on the receiver. If possible ensure that there's no F

ASST transm i tter i n operat i on near th e rece i ver. When the receiver is turned on : •Red when on "Normal mode " •Green and Red (makes Orange) when on "High Speed mode". (After two( 2 ) seconds, change to Red.) I f th ere are some FASST transm i tters turne d on near th e rece i ver, th e LED mays h ow th e ab ove status for a b ri ef moment before changing to the status indication as shown in the "LED indication" table above

.21 7UDQVPLWWHU
V$QWHQQD 1. As with all radio frequency transmissions, the strongest area of signal transmission is

from the sides of the transmitter's antenna. As such, the antenna should not be pointed GLUHFWO\DWWKHPRGHO,I\RXUÀ\LQJVW\OHFUHDWHVWKLVVLWXDWL RQHDVLO\PRYHWKHDQWHQQD to correct this situation. 3OHDVHGRQRWJUDVSWKHWUDQVPLWWHU
VDQWHQQDGXULQJÀLJKW 'RLQJVRPD\GHJUDGHWKH

quality of the RF transmission to the model. WARNING

After the linking is done, please cycle receiver power and check if the receiver to be linked is really under the control by the transmitter to be linked. Do not perform the linking procedure with motor's main wire connected or with the engine operating as it may result in serious injury. Link Procedure (T10CG transmitter/R6008HS or R6014HS receiver): Each transmitter has an individually assigned, unique ID code. In order to start operation, the receiver must be linked with the ID code of the transmitter with which it is being paired. Once the link is made, the ID code is stored in the receiver and no further linking is necessary unless the receiver is to be used with another transmitter. When you purchase additional 5+65+6UHFHLYHUVWKLVSURFHGXUHLVQHFHVVDU\RWKHUZL VHWKHUHFHLYHUZLOOQRWZRUN

0 to 2 sec. More than 2 sec. 0 sec. 2 sec.
**Press and Hold time** No funct i on (Funct i on) Re-l i nk(ID set) 1. Place the transmitter and the receiver close to each other within one (1) meter. 2. Turn on the transmitter. 3. Check the LED that is placed on the front side of the transmitter to see if the

RF signal is active. When the blue LED is ON solid, the RF signal is being sent. 4. Turn on the receiver. 5. Press down the Link/Modeswitch for more than two seconds, and release the switch. The receiver begins the linking

operation. :KHQWKHOLQNLQJLVFRPSOHWHWKH /('LQWKHUHFHLYHUZLOOF KDQJHWRVROLGJUHHQ3OHDVHFRQ¿UP WKDWWKHVHUYRVDUHQRZ

operational from your transmitter. Please refer to the table below for the LED status of the receiver's condition. LED Indication (R6008HS/R6014HS) No signal reception Red : On Receiving signals Green: On Receiving signals, but ID is unmatched. Green: Blink Unrecoverable failure (EEPROM, etc.) Red and Green turn on alternately.22 Range Testing Your R/C System It is extremely important to range check your models prior to each flying session. This enables you to ensure that HYHU\WKLQJLVIXQFWLRQLQJDVLWVKRXOGDQGWRREWDLQPD[LPXPHQ MR\PHQWIURP\RXUWLPHÀ\LQJ7KH7&*WUDQVPLWWHU incorporates a system that reduces its power output and allows you to perform such a range check. Power Down mode (TM10 POWER MODE): We have installed a special "Power Down Mode" for doing a ground range check. To access the "Power Down Mode" hold down the DIAL while turning on the transmitter. Doing so will bring up TM10 POWER MODEmenu. To activate the "Power Down Mode" press DIAL and the home screen will appear. During this mode, the RF power is reduced so the range test can be performed. In addition, when this mode is activated the blue LED on the front of the transmitter starts blinking and the transmitter gives users a warning with a beeping sound every 3 seconds. The "Power Down Mode" continues for 90 seconds and after that the power will go back to the normal level. To exit the "Power Down Mode" before the 90 seconds, press DIAL again. This mode is available 1 time only so if you need to re-use WKLVIXQFWLRQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUPXVWEHF\FOHG1(9(5VWDUW À\LQJZKHQWKH3RZHU'RZQ0RGHLVDFWLYH 1. With the "Power Down Mode" on, walk away from the model while simultaneously operating the controls. Have an

DVVLVWDQWVWDQGE\WKHPRGHOWRFRQ¿UPWKDWDOOFRQWUROVDUHFR PSOHWHO\DQGFRUUHFWO\RSHUDWLRQDO<RXVKRXOGEHDEOHWR walk approximately 30-50 paces from the model without losing control. 2. If everything operates correctly, return to the model. Set the transmitter in a safe, yet accessible, location so it will be

within reach after starting the engine or motor. Be certain the throttle stick is in the low throttle position, then start the engine or motor. Perform another range check with your assistant holding the aircraft with the engine running at various VSHHGV,IWKHVHUYRVMLWWHURUPRYHLQDGYHUWHQWO\WKHUHPD\E HDSUREOHP:HZRXOGVWURQJO\VXJJHVW\RXGRQRWÀ\XQWLO WKHVRXUFHRIWKHGLI¿FXOW\KDVEHHQGHWHUPLQHG/RRNIRUORRVH VHUYRFRQQHFWLRQVRUELQGLQJSXVKURGV$OVREHFHUWDLQ that the battery has been fully charged.2 3 T RAN S MITTER DI S PLAY S & BUTTON S :K HQ \ RX ¿ UVWWXUQRQ \ RXUWUDQVP L WWHUDFRQ¿ UPDW L RQ G RX EO H E HHSVRXQ G VDQ G WK HVFUHHQV K RZQ E H O RZDSSHDUV%HIRUH À\LQJRUHYHQVWDUWLQJWKHHQJLQHEHVXUHWKDWWKHPRGHOW\SH DQGQDPHDSSHDULQJRQWKHGLVSOD\PDWFKHVWKHPRGHOWKDW \ RXDUHD E RXWWR À\ ,I \ RXDUH L QWK HZURQ JPR G H OPHPRU \

VHUYRVPD\ E HUHYHUVH G DQ G WUDYH O VDQ G WUL PVZ LOO E HZURQ J  p otentially leading to a crash. (G L WEXWWRQVDQG 6 WDUWXS 6 FUHHQ DSSHDUVZKHQV \ VWHP L V ¿ UVWWXUQHGRQ 

M O

DE BUTT O

N

: (k e y) Press and hold MO DE B U TT ON for one second to open programming menus. Press MODE BUTTON to switch be twee n BA S I C an d A DVAN C E menus. HELI on ly : Press MODE BUTTON to scroll between conditions in certain functions

. END BUTT O

N: ( key ) Press END BUTTON to return to prev i ous screen. C l oses funct i ons b ac k to menus, c l oses menus to start-up screen. CU RSO R LE V ER : C ontro l C URSO R LEVER WR VFUR OO XS  VFUR OO G RZQ VFUR OO O HIW VFUR OO U LJK W DQ G  VH O HFWWK H RSW L RQWR H GL W Z L WKL Q D function. P r ess C URSO R LEVER WRSD J HXS  SD J H G RZQZ L WKL Q BAS I C or ADVAN C E m e nu o r a f un c t io n . Turn DIAL : T

urn D I

A L clockwise or counterclockwise to scroll through choices within an option of a function. For example, to VH O HFWZKL F KVZ L WF KFRQWUR O V G XD OWULS O HUDWHV P res s D IAL : Pr ess DIAL to se l ect th e actua lfunct i on y ou w i s hto e di t from th e menu. Press DIAL DQGKROGRQHVHFRQGWRFRQ¿UPPDMRUGHFLVLRQVVXFKDVWKHGHFL VLRQWRVHOHFWDGLIIHUHQWPRGHOIURP m emor y

, cop yone mo d e lmemor yover anoth er, tri m reset, store c h anne lpos i t i on i n Fa il Safe, c h an g e mo d e ltype, reset entire model. An on screen inquiry will ask if you are sure. P ress DIAL a g a i n to accept th e c h an g e. PUSH

**Rudder trim**

**display Aileron trim**  **display Elevator trim**  **display 2**  **. 4G-7CH/10CH:**  Modulat i on i nd i cator **128:** CAMPac d i splay (10CG/10C data) **9C:** CAMPac d i splay (9C/9CS data)

**Battery voltage**  **Timers Throttle trim** 

**display Model number**  **and name**

**Dial CURSOR lever** 

**END button**  **MODE button**  **Total timer display <TIMER>** Shows the cumulated ON t i me. (hours:m i nutes) **Up/down timer display <ST1 .**  **ST2>** (m i nutes:seconds) **Model timer display <MDL>** Shows the cumulated ON t i me for each model.(hours:m i nutes) **MIX:** M i xer Alert

**Resetting timers:** Select the des i red t i mer w i th CURSOR lever. The t i mer d i splay flashes. To reset the t i mer, press D i al for one second.24 WARNING & ERROR DISPLAYS An alarm or error indication may appear on the display of your transmitter for a number of reasons, including when the transmitter power switch is turned on, when the battery voltage is low, and several others. Each display has a unique sound associated with it, as described below. MODEL SELECTION ERROR:Warning sound: 5 beeps (repeated 3 times) The MODEL SELECTION warning is displayed when the transmitter attempts to load a model memory from a memory module (optional CAMPac ) that is not currently plugged into the transmitter. When this occurs, model No. 01 is automatically loaded. 'RQRWÀ\XQWLO WKHSURSHUPRGHOLVORDGHGLQWRPHPRU\ Reinsert the memory module, and recall the desired setup using the model select function. LOW BATTERY ERROR:Warning sound: Continuous beep until transmitter is powered off. The LOW BATTERY warning is displayed when the transmitter battery voltage drops below 8.5V. Land your model as soon as possible before loss of control due to a dead battery. MIXER ALERT WARNING:Warning sound: 5 Beeps (repeated until problem resolved or overridden) The MIXER ALERTwarning is displayed to alert you whenever you turn on the transmitter with any of the mixing switches active. This warning will disappear when the offending switch or control is deactivated. Switches for which warnings will be issued at power-up are listed below: ACRO :Throttle cut, idle-down, snap roll, airbrake GLID %XWWHUÀ\FRQGLWLRQV HELI :Throttle cut, throttle hold, idle-up If turning a switch OFF does not stop the mixing warning: When the warning does not stop even when the mixing switch indicated by the warning display on the screen is turned off, the functions described previously probably use the same switch and the OFF direction setting is reversed. In short, one of the mixings described above is not in the OFF state. In this case, reset the warning display by pressing CURSOR LEVER . Next, change one of the switch settings of the duplicated mixings. BACKUP ERROR:Warning sound: 4 beeps (repeated continuously) The BACKUP ERROR warning occurs when the transmitter memory is lost for any reason. If this occurs, all of the data will be reset when the power is turned on again. [Note] At this warning display, the transmitter transmits in 2.4G-10CH mode even if the set-up mode is 2.4G-7CH mode. Do not fly when this message is displayed : all programming has been erased and is not available. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service. MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE DISPLAY This warning appears when an (optional) CAMPacPHPRU\PRGXOHLVXVHGLQWKHWUDQVPLWWHUIRUWKH¿UVWWLPH:K HQWKH MODE BUTTON is pressed, initialization of the module begins, after which the memory module can be used. Once the module is initialized, the display will not appear again. The 10C CANNOT convert data from other radio types (i.e. 8U, 9Z). Installation of a CAMPacwith data from another radio type will result in reinitialization of the CAMPacand loss of all data. RF ERROR:Warning sound: A single long beep. ÀDVKLQJ The single beep lets you know that the RF output has stopped for any reason. The blue RF light also goes out. Return your transmitter to Futaba for service.25 AIRCRAFT (ACRO ) MENU FUNCTIONS Please note that all BASIC menu functions are the same for airplanes (ACRO ), sailplanes ( GLID ), and helicopters ( HELI ). The glider BASIC menu includes MOTOR CUTthat is discussed in the Glider section and does not include IDLE-DOWN or THRCUT ; the helicopter BASIC PHQXLQFOXGHVDGGLWLRQDOIHDWXUHVVZDVKSODWHDGMXVWPHQWDQGWKURWWOHSLWFKFXUYHVDQGUHYRIRU 1RUPDOÀLJKWPRGHWKDWDUHGLVFXVVHGLQWKH+HOLFRSWHUVHFWLRQ

 AIRPLANE (ACRO ) FUNCTIONS ................................ 25 Map of Functions........................................................ 26 Quick Guide to Setting up a 4-channel Airplane ...... 27 ACRO BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS ................................ 30 MODELSubmenu: MODEL SELECT , COPY , NAME .......... 30 PARAMETER Submenu: RESET , TYPE , MODUL , ATL , AILE-2 , CONTRAST , BACK-LIGHT , HOME-DISP , USER NAME , LOGIC SW ............................................................................. 33 Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38 END POINT .................................................................. 39 Idle Management: IDLE DOWN and THR-CUT .............. 40 'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ) .......... 42 TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45 Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH ) ............................................................................. 46 TRAINER ..................................................................... 47 TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48 SERVO Display ........................................................... 49 Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe ( F/S ) ......................... 50 ACRO ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ........................... 51 Wing types ................................................................ 51 FLAPERON ................................................................... 52 FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53 Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF ) ................................. 54 Using a 5-channel receiver: AILE-2 ............................ 55 ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56 Tail types ................................................................... 56 ELEVON ....................................................................... 56 Twin Elevator Servos (AILEVATOR ) ............................ 57 V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58 SNAP ROLL .................................................................. 59 0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61 ELEV-FLAP .................................................................... 62 AIRBRAKE BUTTERFLY (crow) ..................................... 63 THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65 THROTTLE DELAY ......................................................... 66 THROTTLE CURVE ........................................................ 67 Linear, Prog. mixes1-4 ............................................. 68 Curve, Prog. mixes5-8 ............................................. 71 GYA gyro mixing ( GYRO SENSE ) ............................... 7326 MAP OF ACRO BASIC FUNCTIONS



## ACRO Basic Menu ( for one second) (Startup screen)

(Bas i c Menu 1/2) To return to the Startup screen, press the End key.

(Bas i c Menu 2/2) To enter the Bas i c Menu, press the Mode key for one second.

Press Mode key to toggle back and forth between BASIC and ADV ANCE menus. Press Cursor lever to page up and down through the 2 pages of screens i n each menu. Note that all funct i ons wh i ch have more than one page have a <1/2> i nd i cator i n the upper r i ght hand corner to i nd i cate page 1 of 2 or page 2 of 2.

Use Cursor lever to h i ghl i ght funct i on i n Menu screen. Then press the D i al to choose that funct i on.

Mode Select End Selection Cursor Lever (Down/Up/Left/Right)

Dial Right or Left Press Dial Switch Up Switch at Center Switch Down Stick Up Stick Right Stick Down Stick Left Turn Knob Right Turn Knob Left Dial Left Dial Right Press Cursor Lever **C**27 A QUICK GUIDE: GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL AIRCRAFT This guide is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we accomplish; a “by name” description of what we're doing to help acquaint you with the radio; then a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery when setting up your model. For additional details on each function, see that function's section in this manual. The page numbers are indicated in the goals column as a convenience to you. See p.26 for a legend of symbols used. GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE Prepare your aircraft. Install all servos, switches, receivers, etc. per your model's instructions. Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered. Mechanically adjust all linkages as close as possible to proper control throws. Check servo direction. Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming. Name the model. P. 32. [Note that you do not need to do anything to "save” or store this data. Only critical changes such as a MODEL RESETrequire additional keystrokes to accept the change.] Open the BASIC menu, then open the MODELsubmenu. Turn on the transmitter. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** as needed to highlight MODEL

. to choose MODEL

. Go to MODEL NAME

. **C** to NAME

. (First character of model's name is highlighted.) Input aircraft's name. Close the MODELsubmenu. WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU When proper character is displayed,

**C** to move to next character. Repeat as needed. to return to BASIC menu. Reverse servos as needed for proper control operation. P. 38. In the BASIC menu, open (servo) REVERSE

. **C** to REVERSE

. to choose REVERSE

. Choose desired servo and reverse its direction of travel. (Ex: reversing rudder servo.) **C** to CH4: RUDD

. so REV is highlighted. Repeat as needed. Adjust Travels as needed to match model's recommended throws (usually listed as high rates). P. 39. From BASIC menu, choose END POINT

. **C** to END POINT

. to choose END POINT

. Adjust the servo's end points. (Ex: throttle servo) Close the function. **C** to THROTTLE

. THROTTLE STICK
. until carb barrel closes as desired. THROTTLE STICK
. until throttle arm just opens carb fully at full THROTTLE STICK
. Repeat for each channel as needed.28 With digital trims you don’t shut the engine off with THROTTLE TRIM. Let's set up IDLE-DOWN and "throttle cut" ( THR-CUT ) now. GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE Set up IDLE-DOWN

. P. 40. IDLE-DOWN slows the engine's idle for landings, sitting on the runway, and maneuvers such as spins. The normal (higher idle) setting (when IDLE-DOWN is off) is for engine starting, taxi, and most ÀLJKWPDQHXYHUVWRPLQLPL]HFKDQFHRI DÀDPHRXW From the BASIC menu, choose IDLEDOWN

. **C** to IDLE-DOWN

. to choose IDLE-DOWN

. Activate and adjust IDLE-DOWN

. **C** to MIX

. to OFF

. C

to center position. Screen now reads ON

.

**C** to RATE

. to increase rate until engine idles reliably but low enough to sit still. Optional: change switch command from C center-and-down to any other switch. (Not needed in this example.) Close the Function. THR-CUTshuts the engine off completely ZLWKWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFK P. 41. (NOTE: DO NOT assign IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTto both positions of a 2position switch. See IDLE-DOWN for details.) From the BASIC menu, choose THR-CUT

. **C** to THR-CUT

. to choose THR-CUT

. Activate, assign SWITCH and adjust. Close the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFF

. **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. **C** to RATE

. C to down position. THROTTLE STICK
. u n t i l t h r o t t l e b a r r e l c l o s e s completely. 6HW XS GXDOWULSOH UDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO ( D/R , EXP ). P. 42. (Note that in the middle of the left side of the screen is the name of the channel AND the switch position you are adjusting. Two or even THREE rates may be set per channel by simply choosing the desired switch and programming percentages with the switch in each of its 2 or 3 positions.) From the BASIC menu, choose D/R , EXP

. **C** to D/R , EXP

. to choose D/R , EXP

. Choose the desired control, and set the first (Ex: high) rate throws and exponential. A to up position. **C** to CH:

. to choose CH>2(elevator). [note the screen reads ELEV (UP)]

**C** to D/R

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set desired “UP” percentage. ELEVATOR STICK
. as needed to adjust “DOWN” percentage (normally set the same as down.)

**C** to EXP

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set.29 GOALS of EXAMPLE STEPS INPUTS for EXAMPLE Set the second (low) rate throws and exponential. A to down position. **C** to D/R

. Repeat steps above to set low rate. Optional: change dual rate switch assignment. Ex: elevator to switch G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) with 3 positions. **C** to SW

. to G or E

. G

or E to center position. Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate.
Where next? (Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.) TRAINER p. 47. 0XOWLSOHZLQJDQGRUWDLOVHUYRVVHHZLQJW\SHVDQGWDLOW\SHV S Elevator-to-flap, Rudder-to-aileron, flap-to-elevator, and other programmable mixes p. 68. Retractable Gear, Flaps on a Switch, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel setups. p. 46.30 $/22.$77+(5$',2
6)81&7,21667(3%<67(3 MODEL submenu: includes three functions that manage model memory: MODEL SELECT , MODELCOPY and MODELNAME . Since these functions are all related, and are all basic features used with most models, they are together in the MODELsubmenu of the BASIC menu.

NOTE: When you choose a new model in the MODEL SELECTfunction, if the new model is set to a different modulation, you must cycle the transmitter power to change PRGXODWLRQV,I\RXGRQRWF\FOHWKHSRZHUWKHPRGXODWLRQW\SH ZLOOÀDVKRQWKHKRPH screen to remind you. Please note: You are still transmitting on the other modulation until you affect this change. GOAL: STEPS: INPUTS: Select Model #3. N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Open BASIC menu, then open MODEL submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** if required to MODEL

. Choose Model #3. to 3

. &RQ¿UP\RXUFKDQJH for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. Close. Confirm proper modulation of new model memory. If 2.4G LVÀDVKLQJLQWKHXSSHU ULJKWKDQGFRUQHUWKHQWKHQHZPRGHO LVVHW IRU WKHRWKHUUHFHLYHUW\SH7XUQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURIIRQWRFKDQJH WKHPRGXODWLRQ Where next? NAMEthe model: see p. 32. Change MODEL TYPE(aircraft, heli, glider): see p. 34. Change modulation ( 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH ): see p. 35. Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 38. Adjust END POINTs : see p. 39. Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTfor throttle management: see p. 40, 41.

MODEL SELECT : This function selects which of the 15 model memories in the transmitter (or 33 in the optional CAMPac- .WR VHW XS RUÀ\)RUFODULW\ the model's name and an image of its type are indicated after its number. (Each model memory may be a different model type from the other memories.) Note: If you are using the optional CAMPac- 16K, your choices in MODEL SELECTand MODEL COPY will include 16-33, which are the model memories in the CAMPac . You do not have to COPY from the CAMPacto the transmitter prior to working with that model.

T9C/T9CS CAMPac data conversion Although the CAMPac GDWDWKDW KDV EHHQ VDYHG DVWKH GDWD RI D FRQYHQWLRQDO7&7& 6 transmitter cannot be used directly, it is possible to use it by the following method. Copying the information to the model memory of a T10C transmitter. When using the CAMPac , the information will be displayed. For example, as "01<-Pac 01." Press DIAL for 1 second in this state and the check display of "Are you sure?" will appear. Press DIAL again, the data of CAMPacwill be copied to model number"01" of the T10CG transmitter. As for the data of the function added by T10CG, DQLQLWLDOYDOXHLVVHWXSDWWKLVWLPH3OHDVHGRQRWIRUJHWW RFKHFNWKHVHWWLQJVEHIRUHÀ\LQJ In addition, refer to p.17 for the initializing method of the CAMPac
. T10CG/T10C CAMPac data compatibility The CAMPacdata saved from a T10CG or conventional T10C transmitter can be used directly by a T10CG and T10C transmitter. As for the data of functions added by the T10CG: (T10C data -> T10CG): an initial value is set up at this time. (T10CG data -> T10C): the function doesn't work regardless of the data.

ÀDVKLQJ31 MODEL COPY FRSLHVWKHFXUUHQWPRGHOGDWDLQWRDQRWKHUPRGHOPHPRU\LQWKHWUDQVPLWWHURUWKHRSWLRQDO'3.. 128K CAMPac ). The name of the model memory you are copying into is displayed for clarity.
Notes: • Any data in the model copied to will be written over and lost, including name,

type and modulation. Upon completion, it cannot be recovered. • To copy from one T10CG to another, use an optional CAMPac . (Note: The

model may be flown directly off the CAMPac 's memory, not requiring recopying into the 2nd transmitter. For more information on CAMPac s, please see p. 10.) • With the trainer FUNC mode it is not necessary to have the student radio contain

the setup of the aircraft. See TRAINER , p. 47. Data cannot be converted from 8U or 9Z memory types. If a CAMPacis installed into the T10CG that has data on it from another radio type, it will have to be re-initialized which deletes all data. Examples: • Create a new model that is similar to one you have already programmed. • Copy the current model data into another model memory as a backup or before experimenting with new settings. • Store your model data to an optional CAMPacprior to sending your radio for service. (GLW D FRS\ RI \RXUPRGHO¶V GDWDWR À\WKHPRGHOLQ GLIIHUHQW  FRQGLWLRQV LH+HOLFRSWHU XVLQJ KHDYLHUZHLJKW EODGHV glider in extreme wind; airplane model at extreme altitudes). • Store your model data to an optional CAMPacto use or copy the settings into a friend's T10CG (A or H) transmitter so

KHFDQÀ\\RXUPRGHORUXVHLWDVDVWDUWLQJSRLQWIRUVHWWLQJ XSDVLPLODUPRGHO GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Copy model 3 into model 5. N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Open the BASIC menu, then open MODEL submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to MODEL

. Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (Ex: 3) If SELECTdoes not indicate 3 , use MODEL SELECT , p. 25. Go to MODEL COPYand choose the model to copy into. (Ex: 5) **C** to COPY

. to 5

. &RQ¿UP\RXUFKDQJH for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. * Close. Where next? SELECTthe copy you just made: see p. 30. Rename it (it is currently named exactly the same as the model copied): see p. 32. Turn off the transmitter and remove the CAMPacfor safe keeping or insertion LQWRDQRWKHUUDGLRWRÀ\ *Radio emits a repeating "beep" and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being copied. Note that if the power switchis turned off prior to completion, the data will not be copied.32 MODEL NAME : assigns a name to the current model memory. By giving each model a name that is immediately recognizable, \RXFDQTXLFNO\VHOHFWWKHFRUUHFWPRGHODQGPLQLPL]HWKHFKDQ FHRIÀ\LQJWKHZURQJPRGHOPHPRU\ZKLFKFRXOGOHDGWR a crash. Adjustability and values: • Up to 10 characters long. • Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol. • The default names assigned by the factory are in MODEL-xxxx format

( MODEL-0001 IRU¿UVWPRGHOPHPRU\HWF

NOTE: When you COPY one model memory over another, everythingis copied, including the model's name. Similarly, if you change MODEL TYPEor do a MODEL RESET , the entire memory is reset, including MODEL NAME 6RWKH¿UVWWKLQJ\RXZLOO want to do after you COPY a model, change its type, or start from scratch, is rename the new copy to avoid confusion. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Name model 3 “Cap-232_” (where the underline represents a blank space.) Open MODELsubmenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to MODEL

. Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (Ex: 3) If SELECTdoes not indicate 3 , perform MODEL SELECT , p. 25. Go to NAME and change the first character. (Ex: M to C) **C** to M to C

. Choose the next character to change. **C** Repeat the prior steps to complete naming the model. to a (note: lower case is available) Repeat. Close. Where next? Change the MODEL TYPEto glider or helicopter: see p. 34. Change modulation [ 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH ]: see p. 35. Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 38. Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42.33 PARAMETER submenu: sets those parameters you would likely set once, and then not disturb again. Once you have selected the correct model you wish to work with, the next step is setting up the proper parameters for this VSHFL¿FPRGHO • What is the model's type? • What type is the receiver’s modulation [ 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH ]? • Does the model have a normal throttle on channel 3 or do you need full range

trim on channel 3 (ATL )? • ( GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set. First it is important to clear out any old settings in the memory from prior use, using the MODEL RESET

. MODEL RESET : completely resets all data in the individual model you have currently selected. Don't worry - there is no way you can accidentally delete all models in your radio with this function. Only a service center can completely reset your radio's entire memory at once. To delete each model in your radio's memory (for example when selling), you must SELECTeach model, reset that memory, then go SELECTthe next memory, etc. Note that when you COPY one model memory into another or change the model's type, you need not delete all existing data ¿UVWE\XVLQJWKLVIXQFWLRQ COPY completely overwrites anything in the existing model memory, including MODEL NAME

. The MODEL TYPEfunction overwrites all data except name and MODUL

. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Reset model memory 1. N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (Ex: 1) On home screen, check model name and number on top left. If it is not correct, use MODEL SELECT , p. 30. Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Reset the Memory. for one second. &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH Are you sure?displays. * Close. Where next? Now that the memory is reset, name has returned to the default (Ex: MODEL-0001 ). NAMEthe model: p. 32. COPY a different model into this memory: p. 31. SELECTa different model to edit or delete: p. 30. Change the MODEL TYPEto glider or helicopter: see p. 34. Change the receiver modulation [ 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH ]: see p. 35. Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 38. Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. *Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model memory is being reset. Note that if the power switch is turned off prior to completion, the data will not be reset. (ACRO)

(GLID)34 MODEL TYPE : sets the type of programming used for this model. The T10CG has 15 model memories, which can each support: •one powered aircraft (ACRO PHPRU\W\SH ZLWKPXOWLSOH ZLQJ DQGWDLO FRQ¿JXUDWLRQV 6HHWZLQ DLOHURQ VHUYRVWZLQ elevator servos, ELEVON , and V-TAILfor further information.); WKUHHJOLGHUZLQJW\SHVDJDLQZLWKPXOWLSOHWDLOFRQ¿JXUDWLRQ V6HH*OLGHU MODEL TYPEfor details, p. 78; •eight helicopter swashplate types, including CCPM. See Helicopter MODEL TYPEfor details, p. 93. %HIRUHGRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXS\RXUDLUFUDIW¿UVW\RXPX VWGHFLGHZKLFK MODEL TYPEEHVW¿WVWKLVSDUWLFXODUDLUFUDIW (Each model memory may be set to a different model type.) If your transmitter is a T10CAG, the default is ACRO . If it is a T10CHG, the default is HELI(H1)

. ACRO is the best choice for most powered airplanes, but in some circumstances, GLID(2A+1F) may be a better choice. ACRO is usually a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not:

• ACRO adds:

• SNAP-ROLL

• AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support) •For fuel-powered airplanes: IDLE-DOWN , THR-CUT , THROTTLE-NEEDLEmixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming. •But ACRO lacks: •5 seperate conditions for optional setups ( STARTSPEED  DISTANCE LANDING ) If you are using a glider or heli MODEL TYPE, please go to that chapter now to select the proper model type and support your model setup. Note that changing MODEL TYPEresets all data for the model memory, including its name. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Select the proper MODEL TYPEfor your model. Ex: ACRO

. [NOTE: This is one of several functions that requires confirmation to make a change. Only critical changes require additional keystrokes to accept the change.] Open the BASIC menu, then open the PARAMETER submenu. Turn on the transmitter. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) then **C** to highlight PARAMETER

. to choose PARAMETER

. Go to MODEL TYPE

. **C** to TYPE

. Select proper MODEL TYPE

. Ex: ACRO

. &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH Close PARAMETER

. to ACROBATIC

. for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. WRFRQ¿UP to return to BASIC menu.35 Modulation select ( MODUL ): sets the type of modulation transmitted. The modulation of your receiver will determine whether you utilize 2.4G-10CH or 2.4G-7CH setting in MODULduring transmission. Note that you have to turn your transmitter off and back on before a modulation change becomes effective. Be sure you understand and set the FailSafe ( F/S) settings as you intended (see p. 50). 2.4G-10CH 7CH = FASST-2.4GHz system ( 10CH PRGH7CH mode) Adjustability:

• 2.4G-10CH setting for all Futaba FASST-2.4G Multi-ch mode receivers,

UHJDUGOHVVRIQXPEHURIFKDQQHOVLH5+65+65)65 )6

• 2.4G-7CH setting for all Futaba FASST-2.4G 7ch mode receivers, regardless of

QXPEHURIFKDQQHOVLH5))5))05)65)6

NOTE: When you change models in MODEL SELECT , if the new model is set to the other modulation type, \RXPXVWF\FOHWKHWUDQVPLWWHUSRZHUWRFKDQJHPRGXODWLRQV7KH PRGXODWLRQZLOOÀDVKRQWKHKRPHVFUHHQ to remind you until you do so. See p. 30, MODEL SELECT , for details.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change model 1 from 2.4G-10CH to 2.4G-7CH

. Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory (Ex: 1) On home screen, check model name and number on top left and the modulation on top right. If it is not the correct model, use MODEL SELECT , p. 30. Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Go to MODULand change setting. **C** to MODUL

. to 2.4G-7CH

. cycle power ÀDVKHVRQVFUHHQ Close menu and cycle power. POWER OFF
. POWER ON
. Where next? Now that the model is in the proper modulation, the T10CG should communicate ZLWKWKHUHFHLYHU,ILWGRHVQRWFRQ¿UPWKHW\SHRIWKHUHFHL YHU Change MODEL TYPEWRJOLGHUKHOLFRSWHUVHHS Set F/Ssettings for when 2.4G receiver sees interference: see p. 50. Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 38. Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42.36 Second aileron ( AILE-2 ) ( ACRO  GLID 1A+1F GLID 2A+1Fonly): changes the default choice for dual aileron servos from channels 6 ( FLAPERON ) to channels 5 and 6 or channels 3 and 6 ( GLID 1A+1Fonly), or 7 (AIL-DIF) to channels 5 and 7. NOTE: Changing AILE-2only tells the system which servos to utilize if FLAPERON or AIL-DIFis activated. You still must activate that function and complete its setup. For details on twin aileron servos, including using AILE-2 , see p. 55. ( GLID 1A+1Fonly): If using channel 3 for second aileron, the receiver's Battery Fail-Safefunction does not work. Adjustable travel limit (ATL ): makes the channel 3 TRIM LEVER ( THROTTLE TRIM ) effective only at low throttle, disabling the trim at high throttle. This prevents pushrod jamming due to idling trim changes. This function defaults to ON

. If you are not using channel 3 for throttle, you may want trim operation the same as on all other channels. To do so, set ATL to OFF . If you need the ATLto be effective at the top of the stick instead of the bottom, reverse the THR-REV setting. Note that this affects all models in the radio, not just the model you are currently editing. See servo REVERSE , p. 38. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change ATLfrom ON to OFFfor battling robots, tanks, airbrakes and other channel 3 uses. Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Go to ATLand Change. (Ex: to OFF ) **C** to ATL

. to OFF

. Close. Where next? Set up ELEVON IRUWDQNVW\OHFRQWUROWKURWWOHVWHHULQJRQRQH67,&.VHHS  Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTto adjust channel 3 servo at low-stick: see p. 40. 5HDVVLJQDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHOVH[IURPGLDOWRVZLWFKVOLGHUVHHS Utilize servo REVERSE : see p. 38. Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42.

LCD screen adjustment ( CONTRAST BACK-LIGHT ): Adjustability: The following LCD screen adustments are possible. • Contrast adjustment • Backlighting brightness adjustment CONTRAST : adjust the LCD contrast from + 10(dark) to -10(bright). Also, it is possible to adjust the contrast from the home screen. See Adjusting Display Contrast , p.16. BACK-LIGHT MAX DGMXVWVWKHEDFNOLJKWLQJEULJKWQHVVIRUWKHVSHFL¿FSHULRGD SSUR[LPDWHO\VHFRQGVDIWHURSHUDWLQJWKH edit keys. Setting range: OFF(0) to 20(bright). BACK-LIGHT MIN DGMXVWVWKHEDFNOLJKWLQJEULJKWQHVVDIWHUWKHDERYHVSHFL¿FS HULRG6HWWLQJUDQJH2))WR MAX setting. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change CONTRASTfrom 0 to +2 . O p e n B A S I C m e n u , t h e n o p e n PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to PARAMETER

. Go to CONTRASTand change setting. (Ex: +2 ) **C** to CONTRAST

. to +2

. Close. Throttle Reverse( THR-REV) ( GLID only): is a special function that reverses the throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to the stick's upper half. The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set. Default setting depends on the THR-REV setting in the TX SETTING menu, see p.17.37 Home screen display mode selection ( HOME-DISP ) ( HELI only): selects the display item in the home screen for HELI

.

ILLUST : displays the illustration of helicopter in the home screen. (default) THR/PIT : displays the current throttle and pitch position in the home screen. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change the display mode from ILLUSTto THR/PIT

. O p e n B A S I C m e n u , t h e n o p e n PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to PARAMETER

. Go to HOME-DISPand change setting. (Ex: THR/PIT) **C** to HOME-DISP

. to THR/PIT

. Close.

USER NAME : assigns your transmitter's name which is displayed in the home screen. Adjustability and values: • Up to 10 characters long. • Each character may be a letter, number, blank, or a symbol. • The default name assigned by the factory is the "Futaba" logo.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Name USER NAME“Futaba”. Open BASIC m e n u , t h e n o p e n PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Go to USER NAMEand select the first character. (Ex: _ to F) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to USER NAME to F

. Choose the next character to change. **C** Repeat the prior steps to complete naming the model. to u (note: lower case is available) Repeat. Close. THR/PITmode ILLUSTmode38 Servo reversing ( REVERSE ): changes the direction an individual servo responds to a CONTROL STICK motion. [Since channel 9 and 10 are switch only, its servo REVERSE is in the AUX-CHcontrol screen with its switch assignment. See p. 46.] For CCPM helicopters, be sure to read the section on SWASH AFR (p. 95) before reversing any servos. With the exception of CCPM helicopters, always complete your servo reversing prior to any other programming. When using ACRO  GLID functions that control multiple servos, such as FLAPERON or V-TAIL , it may be confusing to determine whether the servo needs to be reversed or a setting in the function needs to be reversed. Refer to the instructions for each specialized function for further details. Always check servo direction prior to every flight as an additional SUHFDXWLRQWRFRQ¿UPSURSHUPRGHOPHPRU\KRRNXSVDQGUDGLRI XQFWLRQ NOTE: THR-REV is a special function that reverses the entire throttle control, including moving the trim functionality to the Stick’s upper half. To use THR-REV , turn off the transmitter, hold down the MODE and ENDkeys, turn on. CURSOR DOWN to THR-REV and turn the DIAL to REV . Turn the transmitter off and back on. This change affects all models in the radio. ( GLID only): The separate THR-REV settings for each model can be set, see p.36. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Reverse the direction of the elevator servo. Open REVERSEfunction. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to REVERSE

. C h o o s e p r o p e r c h a n n e l a n d s e t direction. (Ex: ELEV REV) **C** to ELEV

. to REV

. for 1 second. Close. Where next? Adjust servo travel with END POINT : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. 6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS Set up trainer functions: see p. 47. Logic switch selection ( LOGIC SW): The various functions in the T10CG can be selected by switch. The Logic switch can be assigned to the following functions: THR-CUT , IDLE DOWN , AUX-CH , TIMER , PROG. MIX , AIRBRAKE , ELEV-FLAP , and AILEFLAPfunctions. The logic switch can activate functions by two switches combinations. It is also possible to select from 2 types of logic, either AND or OR, can be selected. Adjustability: • Three logic switches can be used.

( Lsw1 , Lsw2 , and Lsw3 ) • SW(1), SW(2), SW(3):

Any SWITCH A-H or THR-STK S • Switch position ( POSI ) • Logic mode: AND or OR ( MODE ) Logic combination table: SWITCH LOGIC SW(1) SW(2) AND OR

off off off off off on off on on off off on on on on on GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Ex: Switch A and Bare calculated by AND logic. ( A = down, B= down) Open BASIC menu, then open LOGIC SW menu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to LOGIC SW

. Go to POSI and change setting. (Ex: DOWN ) **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. Next, SW= B , POSI = DOWN Repeat. Close.39 End Point of servo travel adjustment ( END POINT , also called EPA ): the most flexible version of travel adjustment available. It independently adjusts each end of each individual servo’s travel, rather than one setting for the servo that affects both directions. Again, for CCPM helicopters, be sure to see SWASH AFR (see p. 95) prior to adjusting end points. Adjustability: • Can set each direction independently. • Ranges from 0% (no servo movement at all) to 140%. At a 100% setting, the

throw of the servo is approximately 40° for channels 1-4 and approximately 55° for channels 5-8. • Reducing the percentage settings reduces the total servo throw in that direction.
Examples: • Adjust the throttle high end to avoid binding at the carburetor, and low end to allow for proper carburetor closure. $GMXVWÀDSVRXSWUDYHOLVRQO\VXI¿FLHQWIRUVWUDLJKWDQGOH YHOÀLJKWWULPPLQJZLWKIXOOGRZQWUDYHO

• END POINTPD\EHDGMXVWHGWRWRNHHSDVHUYRIURPPRYLQJRQHGLUHFWLRQ VXFKDVÀDSVQRWLQWHQGHGWRDOVRRSHUDWHDV

spoilers. • Retract servos are not proportional. Changing END POINTwill not adjust the servo. END POINTadjusts only the individual servo. It will have no effect on any other servo that is operated in conjunction with this servo via mix or preset programming such as FLAPERON , AILEVATOR , etc. This is so that each individual servo can be FDUHIXOO\¿QHWXQHGWRDYRLGELQGLQJDQGRWKHUFRQÀLFWV7RDGM XVWWKHWRWDOWUDYHORIDIXQFWLRQVXFKDV FLAPERON , make the adjustments in that function's controls. For CCPM helicopters, adjust the total travel of the function, such as collective pitch, in SWASH AFR

. Adjust the linkage or the END POINT ? It is nearly always best to adjust your linkages to get as close as possible prior to utilizing END POINT . The higher the END POINTsetting, the better position accuracy and the more servo power available at nearly any position (except if using digital servos). Higher END POINTvalues also mean longer travel time to reach the desired position, as you are utilizing more of the servo's total travel. (For example, using 50% END POINTwould give you only half the steps of servo travel, meaning every click of trim has twice the effect and the servo gets there in half the time). • end point (and moving the linkage) = torque, accuracy, but transit time to get there. • end point (instead of adjusting linkages) = travel time, but torque, accuracy. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Decrease the flap servo throw in the upward direction to 5% to allow WULPPLQJRIOHYHOÀLJKWRQO\DQGGRZQ travel to 85% to prevent binding. Open END POINTfunction. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to END POINT

. Choose proper channel and move stick or knob in direction you want to adjust DQGVHWVHUYRWKURZ([ÀDSXS **C** to FLAP

. ÀDSFRQWURO>GHIDXOWLV VR(A) ]. to 5% .* VR(A)
. to 85%

. Close. Where next? Go to SERVO GLVSOD\WRFRQ¿UPWKHGHVLUHGHQGUHVXOWVHHS 0RYHDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHOVWRGLIIHUHQWGLDOVVZLWFKHVVO LGHUVVHHS Set up IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTWRVORZFXWWKHHQJLQHVHHS 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. 6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS Set up trainer functions: see p. 47. Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51. Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57. *You can reset to the initial values by pressing the DIAL for one second.40 Engine idle management: IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT : functions which work with the digital THROTTLE TRIM to provide a simple, consistent means of engine operation. No more fussing with getting trim in just the right spot for landings or takeoffs! For additional engine adjustments, see THROTTLE-NEEDLE(p. 65) and THROTTLE DELAY (p. 66). IDLE-DOWN (ACRO only): lowers the engine idle for: sitting on the runway prior to take off, stalls and spins, and landings. 7KHQRUPDOLGOHVHWWLQJLVDOLWWOHKLJKHUIRUHDVLHUVWDUWVDQ GVDIHÀLJKWVZLWKOHVVULVNRIGHDGVWLFNV Important note: The IDLE-DOWN function is not normally used when starting the engine, and its accidental operation may keep your engine from starting. The 10CG warns that IDLE-DOWN is on when the transmitter is turned on. Be sure to turn off the function, or override the warning by pressing CURSOR lever if you intended the function to be on.

7KLVPD\EHDVVLJQHGWRDQ\VZLWFKSRVLWLRQ6RPHPRGHOHUVDFFL GHQWDOO\DVVLJQ IDLE-DOWN to one side of a switch and THR-CUTto the other. There is no “normal” setting to start the engine. By default IDLE-DOWN is set to SWITCH C center and down. This works well with THR-CUTalso on SWITCH C GRZQ7KH6:,7&+XSLVQRUPDOÀLJKWVWDUWLQJ FHQWHUIRUVORZHUPDQHXYHUVODQGLQJDQGGRZQWRFXWWKHHQJLQH ,I\RXDVVLJQ IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUTto the springloaded TRAINER SWITCH F (10CAG) or H (10CHG), then use the trainer function, you may risk loss of throttle control or deadstick for your student.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Decrease the throttle setting to idle with the flip of a switch for spins and landings. Open BASIC menu, then open IDLE-DOWN function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to IDLE-DOWN

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFF

. With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the rate until engine idles as desired.* THROTTLE STICK
. **C** to RATE

. until engine idles as desired. Optional: change switch assignment. Choose desired switch and position. C**  to SW

. to desired SWITCH
. **C** to POSI

. to desired position. Close. Where next? THR-CUT : see p. 41. *Normally a value of 10- 20%. Secure the fuselage, engine running. Set the THROTTLE STICK to idle. Adjust the IDLE-DOWN UDWHZKLOHÀLSSLQJWKH switch ON and OFF until the desired idle is achieved. Be sure to throttle up periodically to allow the engine to “clean out” an d idle reliably. *Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.41 Throttle cut ( THR-CUT ) (ACRO  HELI  SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\WR VWRSWKH HQJLQH E\ ÀLSSLQJ D VZLWFK ZLWK THROTTLE STICK at idle). The movement is largest at idle and disappears at high throttle to avoid accidental dead sticks. In HELI , there is an additional setting, THR-HOLD . See p. 99. The switch's location and direction must be chosen. It defaults to NULLto avoid accidentally assigning it to a switch, which might result in an unintentional dead VWLFNLQÀLJKW3OHDVHVHH IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTon p. 40.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Decrease the throttle setting (at idle) to stop the engine with the flip of a switch.(Note that you MUST assign a switch. The default is NULL . We recommend SWITCH C in the down position, with IDLE-DOWN programmed to SWITCH C in the center and down positions.) Open BASIC menu, then open THR-CUT function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to THR-CUT

. Activate the function. Choose desired switch, and the position which activates the function. C**  to MIX

. **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the rate until the engine consistently shuts off but throttle linkage is not binding.* C to down position. THROTTLE STICK
. **C** to RATE

. until shuts off. Close. Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47. Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51. Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57. 1RUPDOO\DVHWWLQJRI LVVXI¿FLHQW9LHZLQJWKHFDUEXU HWRUEDUUHOXQWLOLWIXOO\FORVHV LVDGHTXDWHWRJHWDQDSSUR[L PDWHVHWWLQJWKHQWHVWZLWK HQJLQHUXQQLQJWRFRQ¿UP **Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.42 'XDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): assigns adjusted rates and exponential. Dual/Triple Rates:  UHGXFHLQFUHDVHWKH VHUYRWUDYHO E\ IOLSSLQJ D VZLWFK RU (ACRO  GLID ) they can be engaged by any stick position. Dual rates affect the control listed, such as aileron, not just a single (ex: channel 1) servo. For example, adjusting aileron dual rate will affect both aileron servos when using FLAPERON or AIL-DIF , and both aileron and elevator servos’ travel when using AILEVATOR or ELEVON or a CCPM helicopter.

Activation : • Any SWITCH, A-H . If you choose a 3-position switch, then that dual rate instantly becomes a triple rate (see example). • The glider programming offers you the choice of Cond . This option allows you to have a separate rate for each of

condition. ( GLID ) • Stick position ( ACRO  GLID  ([ 2Q UXGGHU \RX QRUPDOO\ XVH RQO\WKH FHQWHU  RIWKH V WLFNPRYHPHQW H[FHSW IRU

H[WUHPHPDQHXYHUV VXFK DV VQDSVVSLQVVWDOOV$VORQJ DV \RXU58''(5 67,&. GRHV QRW H[FHHG  RIPD[LPXP throw, the rudder responds at your lower rate, allowing small, gentle corrections. When the stick passes 90% (ie. stall turn), the rudder goes to high rate’s 90%, which is a MUCH higher amount of travel than your low rate at 89%.) Ex: (At 100% = 1”) Low Rate = 50% High Rate = 100% At 89% Low Rate = .45” At 90% High Rate = .9” [Note] Only if any stick is chosen by the item of "SW1", a switch can also be chosen by the item of "SW2." When operated simultaneously, the switch operation has priority over the stick operation. ( ACRO ) Adjustability: • Range: 0 - 140% (0% would deactivate the control completely.) Initial value =

100% • Adjustable for each direction (ACRO  GLID LH8SGRZQOHIWULJKW([0RVW

PRGHOVÀ\XSULJKWZLWKRXWDQ\HOHYDWRUWULPEXWUHTXLUHVRPHG RZQHOHYDWRU ZKHQLQYHUWHGMXVWWRPDLQWDLQOHYHOÀLJKW%\LQFUHDVLQJWKHG RZQWUDYHOE\ the amount required to hold the model inverted, the model now has equal travel available from level upright or level inverted.)
Exponential: FKDQJHVWKHUHVSRQVHFXUYHRIWKHVHUYRVUHODWLYHWRWKHVWLFN SRVLWLRQWRPDNHÀ\LQJPRUHSOHDVDQW<RXFDQ make the servo movement less or more sensitive around neutral for rudder, aileron, elevator, and throttle (except HELI type - use THROTTLE CURVEinstead). (ACRO type—throttle EXP and THROTTLE CURVE can not be activated simultaneously). Why use expo? Many models require a large amount of travel to perform their best tricks. However, without exponential, WKH\DUH3WRXFK\ ́DURXQGQHXWUDOPDNLQJWKHPXQSOHDVDQWWRÀ\ DQGPDNLQJVPDOOFRUUHFWLRQVYHU\GLI¿FXOW$GGLWLRQDOO\ by setting different exponentials for each rate, you can make the effectiveness of small corrections similar in each rate, as in our example below. The best way to understand exponential is to try it: • Having made no changes yet in the D/R , EXPscreen, move SWITCH Dto “down” (toward the AILERON STICK ). • Cursor down to EXPand dial to +100%. • Move SWITCH Dup. Hold the AILERON STICK DWVWLFNDQGPRYH SWITCH Ddown. • Notice how much less travel there is. *RWRVWLFNDQGUHSHDW1RWLFHKRZWKHWUDYHOLVPXFKFOR VHULIQRWLGHQWLFDO **High Rate**

**High Rate High Rate**  **Low Rate**

**Low Rate 100% 100%** 

**100% 30%**  **0% 90% 90%**  **0%**43 Adjustability: • More sensitivity around neutral. (positive exponential, see example) • Less sensitivity around neutral. (negative exponential, see example) • Adjustable for each direction. (ACRO  GLID ) For throttle, exponential is applied at the low end to help nitro and gasoline engines have a linear throttle response, so that HDFKVWLFNLQFUHDVHVHQJLQH530RIWKHDYDLODEOHUDQJH ,QPRVWHQJLQHVWKLVUDQJHVIURP Special note for helicopters: Helicopter model types have just a single rate for each switch position rather than a rate for each side of the servo’s travel per switch position. Additionally, setting the D/R , EXPfor each switch position requires cursoring back to the No.VHWWLQJDQGFKDQJLQJWKHVZLWFKSRVLWLRQKHUH-XVWÀLSSLQJWK HVZLWFKGRHVQRWDIIHFWWKHVFUHHQ setting, allowing dual rates to be assigned with idle-up and other features on certain switches, and does not require putting WKHPRGHOLQWKDWFRQGLWLRQWRPDNHPRGL¿FDWLRQV Special note for conditions: The helicopter and glider programming offers you the choice of Cond. . This option allows you to have a separate rate for each of the 3 controls automatically selected when changing conditions, for a total of FIVE rates available. Simply change the switch choice to Cond.and then: (HELI) press the CURSOR LEVER to toggle through the 5 conditions while setting the rates. (GLID) activate the corresponding condition to edit the rates. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up dual rates and exponential in a HELI model. Open D/R , EXP

. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to D/R , EXP

. Choose channel. **C** to desired channel. &KRRVH¿UVWVZLWFKSRVLWLRQ **C** to No>

. to UP

. Set rate and exponential (Ex: high rate = 95%, 0% exponential.) **C** to D/R>

. to 95%

. &RQ¿UP 0% EXP

. Go to 2nd switch position and set rate and exponential. **C** to No>

. to DN. Repeat above. Optional: if using a 3 position switch, set 3rd rate. **C** to No>

. to CT. Repeat above. Optional: assign dual rates to have one for each condition. **C** to SW

. to COND. Repeat steps above to adjust for each condition.44 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up aileron triple rates on SWITCH C

with travel settings of 75% (normal), 25% (slow roll) and 140% (extreme aerobatics) and exponential settings of 0%, +15%, and -40% respectively. NOTE: This normal rate has no exponential so it has a very linear, normal feel. This slow roll rate has positive exponential (the opposite of what most people normally use), which makes the servos more responsive around center. This makes the servos feel the same around center in the normal and low rates, but still gives a very slow roll rate at full stick. The 3D rate (extreme aerobatics) has a very high distance of travel nearly twice that of the normal rate. Therefore, using a very high negative exponential setting softens how the servos respond around center stick. This makes the servos respond similarly around center stick for a more comfortable feel. Many modelers like to set up all 3 triple rates on a single 3-position switch, creating a “slow and pretty mode”, a “normal mode”, and a “wild stunts mode” all with the flip of a single switch. To do so, simply set up rates for all 3 controls and assign all 3 to the same 3-position switch. Open D/R , EXPfunction. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to D/R , EXP

. Choose the channel to change (Ex: aileron is already selected) **C** to desired channel. Optional: change switch assignment. **C** to SW1

. to C. Confirm switch is in desired position and set rate. (Ex: up = high rate, 75%). **C** to D/R>

. C

to up position. AILERON STICK
. to 75%. AILERON STICK
. to 75%. Move SWITCH to 2nd rate position and set this particular rate. (Ex: center = low rate, 25%). C to center position. AILERON STICK
. to 25%. AILERON STICK
. to 25%. Optional: if using a 3 position SWITCH, move SWITCH to 3rd position and set this rate (Ex: down = 3D rate, 140%). C to down position. AILERON STICK
. to 140%. AILERON STICK
. to 140%. Optional: instead of using a switch, you can set high rates to be triggered when the stick moves past a certain point. To test this, set aileron high rate to 25%. Now set switch assignment to AIL (90%). Move AILERON STICK to the right and notice the huge jump in travel after the stick moves 90% of its distance. **C** to SW1

. to AILE (90%)

. **C** to D/R>

. AILERON STICK
. to 25%. AILERON STICK
. to 25%. AILERON STICK and watch screen graph. See the change?! You may also change the trigger point by holding the stick at the desired point, then pressing and holding the DIAL
. Set each rate’s EXP

. (Ex: 0%, +15%, -40%) **C** to EXP>

. C

to up position. &RQ¿UP EXPreads 0. C

to down position. AILERON STICK
. to +15%. AILERON STICK
. to + 15%. C

to center position. repeat to set low rate expo to -40%. Repeat above steps for elevator and rudder. Close. Where next? 6HWXSÀLJKWWLPHUVVHHS Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47. Adjust the sensitivity of the trims: see p. 48. Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51. Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57. 6HWXSSURJUDPPDEOHPL[HVWRPHHW\RXUVSHFL¿FQHHGVVHHS

45 TIMER submenu(stopwatch functions): controls three electronic clocks. For example, these clocks may be used to keep WUDFNRIWLPHUHPDLQLQJLQDFRPSHWLWLRQÀ\LQJWLPHRQDWDQN RIIXHODQGRUDPRXQWRIWLPHRQDEDWWHU\HWF

Adjustability: • Count down timer: starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining. If the time is exceeded, it continues to count

below 0. • Count up timer: starts at 0 and displays the elapsed time up to 99 minutes 59 seconds. • Count down timer (Stop type): starts from the chosen time, displays time remaining, and stops at 0. • Model timer: cumulates ON time up to 99 hours 59 minites each model. Once the Model timer function is turned off, the

cumulative time will also be reset to "0:00". • Independent to each model, and automatically updates with model change. • In either TIMER mode, the timer beeps once each minute. During the last twenty seconds, there's a beep each two seconds.

'XULQJWKHODVWWHQVHFRQGVWKHUH
VEHHSVHDFKVHFRQG$ORQ JWRQHLVHPLWWHGZKHQWKHWLPHVHOHFWHGLVUHDFKHG83 DOWN TIMER ) • To Reset, choose the desired timer with the CURSOR lever (while at the startup screen), then press and hold DIAL for 1

second. • Activation by either direction of SWITCH A-H , by THROTTLE STICK ( STK-THR ) (Using the THROTTLE STICK is convenient if you are keeping track of fuel remaining, or for an electric, how much battery is left), by LOGIC SWITCH Lsw1-Lsw3 or by the power SWITCH ( PWR SW). Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38. • Also the reset switch can be assigned ( SWITCH A-H or LOGIC SWITCH Lsw1-Lsw3 ) GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: 6HWWLPHUWRFRXQWGRZQPLQXWHV being controlled by THROTTLE STICK position. This is utilized to keep track of actual Throttle on time to better FRUUHODWHZLWKIXHOEDWWHU\XVDJH Open BASIC menu, then open TIMER function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to page 2. **C** to TIMER

. Go to TIMER<2>

. **C** to 10 (TIMER<2>). Adjust time to 4 min. 30 sec., count down. to 4

. **C** to 00 (TIMER<2>). to 30. Assign to THROTTLE STICK and set trigger point. **C** to ON>SwA (TIMER<2>). to STK THR

. **C** to 50%

. for 1 second to NULL

. THROTTLE STICK to desired SRVLWLRQ([VWLFN for 1 second to set. Close. Where next? Adjust END POINTsDIWHU¿UVWÀLJKWWHVWVHHS $GMXVWDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHODVVLJQPHQWVH[PRYHÀDSVWRDVZLWFK VHHS Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47. TIMER<1> TIMER<2> TIMER<3> (Home screen)46 Auxiliary channel function (including channel 9-10 controls) (AUX-CH GH¿QHVWKHUHODWLRQVKLSEHWZHHQWKHWUDQVPLWWHU controls and the receiver output for channels 5-10. Also, the CH9-10 POSI are used to change the CH9-10 servo direction. Note that the CH9-10 functions are only visible in the AUX-CH screen when 2.4H-10CH modulation is selected. Channels 8-10 are not supported in 2.4G-7CH modulation. Adjustability: • Channels 5-8 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H) , LOGIC SWITCH

(Lsw1-Lsw3) , slider [ VR(D) and VR(E) ], or knob [ VR(A-C) ] for example, moving flaps to a switch or slider, but not the primary control sticks (use programmable mixes to do so, p. 68). ( GLID 1A+1Fonly): Channel 6 may be assigned to Airbrakecontrol stick ( STK-ARBK). • Channels 9-10 may be assigned to any SWITCH (A-H) , LOGIC SWITCH

(Lsw1-Lsw3) and the servo direction may be changed. • Multiple channels may be assigned to the same switch, slider or knob; • Channels set to "NULL" are only controlled by mixes. (Ex: utilizing 2

channels for 2 rudder servos. See mixes, p. 68.) • If GYRO SENSE , GOVERNOR , and THR-NEEDLEfunctions are activated, AUX-CH

settings of related channels become invalid automatically. Related channels: GYRO SENSE(ACRO ): ch. 5, 7, or 8: see p. 73. GYRO SENSE( HELI ): ch. 5: see p. 107. GOVERNOR ( HELI ): ch. 7, or ch. 7 and 8: see p. 108. THR-NEEDLE(ACRO  HELI ): ch. 8: see p. 65. Remember that if you assign primary control of a channel to a switch which you later use for other functions (like GXDOWULSOHUDWHVRUDLUEUDNHVHYHU\WLPH\RXXVHWKDWRWKHU IXQFWLRQ\RXZLOODOVREHPRYLQJWKHDX[LOLDU\FKDQQHO GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: $VVLJQÀDSVWRWKH ULJKWVOLGHU > VR(E) ] and set channel 7 to NULLin preparation to use it as a smoke system control (the smoke system being activated later by a throttle-to-ch.-7 mix). Open BASIC menu, then open AUX-CH function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to page 2. **C** to AUX-CH

. Choose the channel to change. (ex: ch. 6.) **C** to Ch 7

. Change primary control. (ex: to slider.) to Vr-E

. Repeat as needed. (ex: ch. 7 to NULL .) **C** to Ch 7

. to NULL

. Close. Where next? Programmable mixes: see p. 68. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Adjust SUB-TRIM of auxiliary channel to adjust center SWITCH position: see p. 49. Adjust END POINTs(sets end points of travel even when using a switch): see p. 39.47 TRAINER : for training novice pilots with optional trainer cord connecting 2 transmitters. The instructor has several levels of controllability. Adjustability:

• NORM : When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by the student. The set channel is controlled according to any programming set at the student's transmitter.

• FUNC : When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by the student, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter.

• MIX : When the TRAINER SWITCH is ON, the channel set to this mode can be controlled by both the student and the instructor, controlled according to any mixing set at the instructor's transmitter. And the student's mixing rate is adjustable. (default 30%) [Note] However, it becomes invalid even if the channel is not in a student's transmitter. The channel serves as operation by the instructor's transmitter automatically.

• OFF : The channel set to this mode cannot be controlled by the student even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. The set channel is controlled by the instructor only, even when the TRAINER SWITCH is ON. • SWITCH: controlled by spring-loaded SWITCH F (10CAG) or H (10CHG) only. Not assignable. • Compatibility: The 10CG may be master or student with any Futaba transmitter compatible with the cord. Simply plug

the optional trainer cord (For 10CG series, sold separately) into the trainer connection on each transmitter, and follow the guidelines below. Examples: :KHQWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYH DUH VHWWR FUNC ,

5-channel helicopter practice is possible with a 4-channel transmitter. • Set up the model in a second transmitter,

use NORM mode to quickly and safely check proper operation of all functions, then allow WKHVWXGHQWUDGLRWRIXOO\À\WKHPRGHO • Using NORM mode, set lower throws,

different exponentials, even different auxiliary channel settings on the student radio (if it has these features). • To ease the learning curve, elevator and

aileron may be set to the NORM or FUNC mode, with the other channels set to OFF and controlled by the instructor. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Turn on the TRAINER system and set up so student has: fully functional control of aileron and elevator to support FLAPERON and AILEVATOR ; normal control of rudder to allow lowered travel; and no throttle channel control (with the instructor for safety). Open BASIC menu, then open TRAINER function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to page 2. **C** to TRAINER

. Activate TRAINER

. to OFF

. Choose desired channel(s) and proper training type(s). **C** past AILand ELE(default OK). **C** to THR , to OFF

. **C** to RUD , to NORM

. Close. 7(67VWXGHQWUDGLRIXQFWLRQIXOO\SULRUWRDWWHPSWLQJWRÀ\ Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ) on student 10CG: see p.42. Reset trims on student 10CG: see p. 48. Precautions: • NEVER turn on the student's transmitter power. • ALWAYS set the student transmitter modulation mode to PPM

.

As for a T10CG transmitter, PPM signal is always sent by the trainer jack regardless of the modulation mode. • BE SURE that the student and instructor transmitters have identical trim

settings and control motions. Verify by switching back and forth while moving the control sticks.• Always remove the student transmitter's RF module (if it is a moduletype transmitter). • When the TRAINER function is active, the snap roll function is deactivated.

Other functions, such as IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUT , which have been assigned to the same switch, are not deactivated. Always double check your function assignments prior to utilizing the TRAINER function. • When you select a different model, the TRAINER function is deactivated in

the current model for safety reasons.48 TRIM submenu : resets and adjust effectiveness of digital trims. The 10CG has digital trims which are different from conventional mechanical trim sliders. Each TRIM LEVER is actually a two-directional switch. Each time the TRIM LEVER is pressed, the trim is changed a selected amount. When you hold the TRIM LEVER , the trim speed increases. The current trim position is graphically displayed on the start up screen. The TRIM submenu includes two functions that are used to manage the trim options. HELI models only: OFFSETis available in the idle ups. If OFFSETis inhibited, adjustment of the TRIM LEVERS will adjust WKHWULPVIRUDOOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV,I OFFSETis active, then moving the trims within any one condition will effect only that condition. See OFFSET , p. 102. Trim reset ( RESET ): electronically centers the trims to their default values. Note that the SUB-TRIM settings and the trim STEPrate are not reset by this command. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Reset trims to neutral after having adjusted all linkages. N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Open BASIC menu, then open TRIM submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to TRIM

. Request DQGFRQ¿UPWKHUHVHW

. for 1 second. Beep sounds. Close. Where next? Adjust SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49. Adjust trim rate ( STEP ): see below. Adjust END POINTs : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Trim step( STEP ): changes the rate at which the trim moves when the TRIM LEVER is activated. It may be set from 1 to 40 units, depending on the characteristics of the aircraft. Most ordinary aircraft do well at about 2 to 10 units. Generally ODUJHUWULPVWHSVDUHIRUPRGHOVZLWKODUJHFRQWUROWKURZVRUI RU¿UVWÀLJKWVWRHQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWWULPWRSURSHUO\FRUUHFWWKH PRGHO6PDOOHUWULPVWHSVDUHODWHUXVHGWRDOORZYHU\¿QHDGMX VWPHQWVLQÀLJKW GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Double the sensitivity (larger step) of the AILERON TRIM LEVERS for a first flight of an aerobatic model to HQVXUHVXI¿FLHQWUDQJHWRWULPWKHPRGHO IRUOHYHOÀLJKW Open TRIM submenu and choose the STEPyou wish to change. (Ex: aileron) for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to TRIM

. Adjust the size of the step. (Ex: incr. to 8 ) **C** to AILE

. to 8

. Repeat as desired for other channels. **C** to ELEV

. to new setting. Repeat as needed. Close. Where next? Adjust sub trims: see p. 49. Adjust END POINTs : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42.49 SUB-TRIM : makes small changes or corrections to the neutral position of each servo. Range is -120 to +120, with 0 setting, the default, being no SUB-TRIM

. We recommend that you center the digital trims before making SUB-TRIM changes, and that you try to keep all of the SUB-TRIM values as small as possible. Larger SUB-TRIM values affect the servo's range of travel is restricted on one side. The recommended procedure is as follows: • measure and record the desired surface position; • zero out both the trims (TRIM RESETmenu) and the SUB-TRIMs (this menu); • mount servo arms and linkages so that the control surface’s neutral is as correct as possible; and • use a small amount of SUB-TRIM WRPDNH¿QHFRUUHFWLRQV GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Adjust the flap servo's SUB-TRIM until its center exactly matches the aileron servo's center, as they work together as ÀDSHURQV Open BASIC menu, then open SUB-TRIM

. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to SUB-TRIM

. Choose the channel to adjust, and adjust XQWLOVXUIDFHVPDWFK([ÀDS **C** to FLAP as needed. **C** to each channel, Repeat for other channels. as needed. Close. Where next? Adjust trim steps: see p. 48. Adjust END POINTs : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42.

The servo submenu includes two features: • real-time bar-graph display to demonstrate exactly what commands the

transmitter is sending to the servos. (This can be particularly handy in setting up models with complicated mixing functions, because the results of each stick, lever, knob, switch input and delay circuit may be immediately seen.) VHUYR F\FOH IXQFWLRQWR KHOSORFDWH VHUYR SUREOHPV SULRUWRL QÀLJKW IDLOXUHV

(channels 1-8) GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: View the result of reassigning channel 6 from VR(A) knob to three-position SWITCH C
. Cycle the channel 6 servo. C o m p l e t e d e s i r e d p r o g r a m m i n g function. (Ex: in AUX-CH , move ch. 6 to SWITCH C ) See AUX-CH for details. (p. 39.) Open the SERVO function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to SERVO

. Move each control to see the operation. (Ex: SWITCH C in all positions) C to center position. Note change in position of ch. 6 servo. Prepare all servos to be cycled and cycle. Plug in servos. POWER ON
. End cycling and close. Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up desired programmable mixes: see p. 61. Set up dual aileron servos: see p. 51. Set up dual elevator servos: see p. 57. SERVO display and cycle submenu: displays radio's output to channels 1-10.50 FailSafe (loss of clean signal and low receiver battery) submenu( F/S ): sets responses in case of loss of signal or low Rx battery. FailSafe ( F/S ): instructs a 2.4G receiver what to do in the event radio interference is received. Adjustability: • Each channel may be set independently. ( 2.4G-7CH mode: ch3 only) • The NOR (normal) setting holds the servo in its last commanded position. • The F/S(FailSafe) function moves each servo to a predetermined position. • NOTE: the setting of the throttle's F/Salso applies to the Battery F/S(see

below). Examples: • The F/Ssetting is used in certain competitions to prevent the aircraft from flying away and doing potential damage

elsewhere. Conversely, the F/SVHWWLQJPD\DOVREHXVHGWRJRWRQHXWUDORQDOOVHUYRVKRSHI XOO\NHHSLQJWKHSODQHÀ\LQJ long enough to regain control. • Competition modelers often maintain the NOR function so that brief interference will not affect their model's maneuver. • Set the throttle channel so that the engine idles when there is interference (ACRO 7KLVPD\JLYHHQRXJKWLPHWRÀ\DZD\

from and recover from the radio interference and minimize damage if crashed. • For helicopters, NOR is typically the safest choice.

• We also recommend setting a gasoline engine's electronic kill switch to the OFF position in the F/Sfunction for safety reasons. Updating F/S Settings: If you specify a F/Ssetting, the FailSafe data is automatically transmitted. When you choose the F/Smode, check that your settings are as desired by turning off the transmitter power switch and verifying that the servos move to the settings that you chose. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change the receiver FailSafe command for channel 8 (gasoline engine kill switch) to a preset position. N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Open the BASIC menu, then open F/S function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to F/S

. Choose Channel to change. (ex: Ch. 8) **C** to Ch 8. Set and FRQ¿UP fail safe command. that controls channel 8 to desired OFFposition. for 1 second to store. Repeat as desired. Close. Where next? Read below for information on Battery FailSafe. Adjust END POINTsto gain proper F/Sresponses if needed: see p. 39. Adjust SUB-TRIM to gain proper F/Sresponses if needed: see p. 49. Battery FailSafe ( F/S ): a second battery low warning feature (separate from the transmitter low voltage warning). When the airborne battery voltage drops below approximately 3.8V, the 2.4G receiver’s battery F/Sfunction moves the throttle to a predetermined position. When the Battery F/Sfunction is activated, your engine will move to idle (if you haven't set a position) or a preset position. You should immediately land. You may temporarily reset the Battery F/Sfunction by moving the THROTTLE STICK to idle. You will have about 30 seconds of throttle control before the battery function reactivates. Adjustability:

• NOR F/Ssetting for throttle results in Battery F/Sgoing to the servo position reached by moving THROTTLE STICK to the bottom with TRIM LEVER centered;

• F/Sposition setting for throttle results in Battery F/Salso going to the same throttle servo position as the regular F/S

. If using a 6V (5-cell) receiver battery, it is very likely that your battery will be rapidly running out of charge before battery FailSafe takes over. It is not a good idea to count on battery FailSafe to protect your model at any time. This is especially true when using a 5-cell battery.51 ACRO ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS: Aircraft wing types(ACRO  GLID ): There are 3 basic wing types in aircraft models: • Simple. Model uses one aileron servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness into a single receiver channel) and has a tail.

This is the default setup and requires no specialized wing programming. • Twin Aileron Servos. Model uses 2 aileron servos and has a tail. see Twin Aileron Servos. • Tail-less model (flying wing). Model uses 2 wing servos working together to create both roll and pitch control. see

ELEVON

. Twin Aileron Servos (with a tail) (ACRO  GLID ): Many current generation models use two aileron servos, plugged into two VHSDUDWHUHFHLYHUFKDQQHOV,I\RXUPRGHOLVDÀ\LQJZLQJZLWK RXWVHSDUDWHHOHYDWRUVVHH ELEVON , p. 56.) %HQH¿WV • Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched travel. • Redundancy, for example in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision. • Ease of assembly and more torque per surface by not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2 surfaces. +DYLQJPRUHXSDLOHURQWUDYHOWKDQGRZQWUDYHOIRUVWUDLJKWHU UROOVDLOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDOVHHJORVVDU\IRUGH¿QLWLRQ 8VLQJWKHWZRDLOHURQVQRWRQO\DVDLOHURQVEXWDOVRDVÀDSV LQZKLFKFDVHWKH\DUHFDOOHGÀDSHURQV • Set a negative percentage to reverse the operation of one of the servos. Options:

• FLAPERON : •Uses CH6 for the second servo. $OORZVÀDSDFWLRQDVZHOODVDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPWKHDLOHURQV •Provides FLAP-TRIM IXQFWLRQWRDGMXVWWKHQHXWUDOSRLQWRIWKHÀDSHURQVIRUOHYHOÀLJKW •Also allows aileron differential in its own programming (instead of activating AIL-DIFF ). • Aileron Differential (AIL-DIFF ): •Uses CH7 for the 2nd servo. /HDYHV&+	&+IUHHIRUÀDSRSHUDWLRQVXFKDVÀDSHURQDQGÀ DSDFWLRQWRJHWKHULQ AIRBRAKE . (see p. 63). •Allows for more up aileron travel than down for straighter rolls. You will need to choose either of FLAPERON or AIL-DIFFfor your model's setup. If you need the ailerons to also operate as ÀDSV\RXZLOOPRVW OLNHO\ZDQWWRXVH FLAPERON ,I\RXUPRGHOKDV DLOHURQVHUYRVDQGÀDSVWKHQ AIL-DIFFis probably the easiest choice. (For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, such as one with 4 wing servos using full span ailerons DQGIXOOVSDQÀDSVDVZHOODV AIRBRAKEFURZDQGRWKHUIHDWXUHVSOHDVHYLVLWRXU)$4DWZZZIXWDEDUF FRP?IDT?0DQ\ other setup examples are also available at this site.) NOTE: Only one of the three wing-type functions ( FLAPERON , AIL-DIFF , and ELEVON ) can be used at a time. All three IXQFWLRQVFDQQRWEHDFWLYDWHGVLPXOWDQHRXVO\7RDFWLYDWHDGLI IHUHQWZLQJW\SHWKH¿UVWPXVWEHGHDFWLYDWHG GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Deactivate FLAPERON so that AIL-DIFFor ELEVON can be activated. Open the FLAPERON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to FLAPERON

. Deactivate the function. **C** to MIX

. to INH

. Close function. Where next? Set up AILE-DIFF(see p. 54) or ELEVON (see p. 56).52 Using FLAPERON (ACRO  GLID 1A+1F):

The FLAPERON PL[LQJIXQFWLRQXVHVRQHVHUYRRQHDFKRIWKHWZRDLOHURQVDQ GXVHVWKHPIRUERWKDLOHURQDQGÀDSIXQFWLRQ )RUÀDSHIIHFWWKHDLOHURQVUDLVHORZHUVLPXOWDQHRXVO\2IFRXUVHDLOHURQIXQFWLRQPRYLQJLQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVLVDOVR performed. [Note] When changing the polarity (positive or negative) of a rate, "change rate dir?" is displayed as a check. Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling the alarm display. ( GLID only) Once FLAPERON LVDFWLYDWHGDQ\WLPH\RXSURJUDP&+RUÀDSLH ELEVATOR-FLAPmixing), the radio commands both VHUYRVWR RSHUDWHDVÀDSV7KHDPRXQW RIWUDYHODYDLODEOHDVÀD SVLVLQGHSHQGHQWO\DGMXVWDEOHLQ FLAPERON . A trimming feature is also available (see FLAP-TRIM WR DGMXVW ERWK QHXWUDO SRV LWLRQVWRJHWKHU IRU VWUDLJKWDQGOH YHO ÀLJKW RU VOLJKW LQFUHDVHVGHFUHDVHVRIWKHÀDSDQJOH END POINTand SUB-TRIM both still adjust each servo individually. Adjustability: • Each aileron servo's up travel can be set separate from its down travel, creating aileron differential. (See example). (DFKDLOHURQVHUYR
VWUDYHOZKHQDFWXDWHGDVDÀDSLVVHSDUDW HO\DGMXVWDEOH • The separate FLAPERON settings for each condition can be set. ( GLID ) 127($FWLYDWLQJÀDSHURQVRQO\PDNHVWKHDLOHURQVZRUNDVDLOHU RQVDQGWHOOVWKHUDGLRKRZIDU\RXZDQWWKHPWRPRYH DVÀDSV,IGHVLUHG\RXWKHQDFWLYDWHRWKHUSURJUDPPLQJWKDWP RYHVWKHPDVÀDSV FLAP-TRIM LVWKHÀDSWULPPLQJIHDWXUHWKDWDOORZVWKHÀDSVWRPRYHLQUH DFWLRQWRWKHFKDQQHOFRQWURO,WLVPHDQWRQO\ IRUWULPPLQJWKHÀDSV
FHQWHUEXWFDQDOVREHXVHGDVIXOOÀDS FRQWURO6HHS AIRBRAKELVDIHDWXUHWKDWGURSVÀDSHURQVDVÀDSDQGDOVRFRPSHQVDWHV ZLWKHOHYDWRULIGHVLUHG6HHS ELEVATOR-FLAPZRXOGDGGHOHYDWRUPL[LQJLQWRWKHÀDSPRYHPHQWIURPWKHÀDSGLDODIWHU FLAP-TRIM is activated. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate twin aileron servos, FLAPERON

. Input 10% less down travel than up travel (aileron differential) within the FLAPERON programming. (Decrease right aileron is down travel to 90%, decrease left aileron's down travel to 90%.) $GMXVWWRWDOÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOHWR of aileron travel available. Open the FLAPERON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to FLAPERON

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Optional: adjust the up/down travel separately for the 2 servos.(Ex: 90% down.) **C** to AIL1

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. **C** to AIL2

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. Optional: adjust the aileron's travel so WKH\PRYHDVÀDSV([HDFKVHUYRÀDS travel to 50% .) **C** to FLP2

. to +50 %. **C** to FLP1

. to -50 %. Close menu. Where next? Set FLAP-TRIM : see p. 53. Set up AIRBRAKEmix: see p. 63. 0L[ÀDSHURQ
VÀDSPRWLRQWRDQRWKHULQERDUGÀDSSOXJJHGLQWRDX[VHHS 9LHZDGGLWLRQDOPRGHOVHWXSVRQWKHLQWHUQHWZZZIXWDEDUFFR PIDT * If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON, you must deactivate AIL-DIFFor ELEVON . see p. 51. (GLID 1A+1F) (ACRO)53 Using FLAP-TRIM FDPEHUWRDGMXVWÀDSHURQV (ACRO  GLID )

FLAP-TRIM assigns the primary flaperon control [defaults to VR(A) ] to allow trimming in flight of the flap action of ÀDSHURQV1RWHHYHQLI FLAP-TRIM is made active with AIL-DIFF , it will not have any effect. The ONLY function that allows FRQWURORIWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWKH AIL-DIFFFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLV AIRBRAKE .) Most modelers use AIRBRAKE , or programmable PL[HVWRPRYHWKHÀDSVWRDVSHFL¿HGSRVLWLRQYLDPRYHPHQWRI DVZLWFK FLAP-TRIM PD\DOVREHXVHGDVWKHSULPDU\ÀDSFRQWUROLQÀLJKW%\GRLQJVR\RXFDQDVVLJQ&+WRDSRVLWLRQVZLWFK ZLWK D VSRLOHURQ QHXWUDO DQG IODSHURQ SRVLWLRQ DQG HYHQ DGMXVWWKH SHUFHQWDJHWUDYHOHG DV IODSHURQVSRLOHURQ E\ changing the Flap Trim travel. (Note that there is only one setting, not independent settings for up and down travel.)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Add FLAP-TRIM to allow the model's DLOHURQVWREHWULPPHGWRJHWKHUDVÀDSV at any time during the flight,with a maximum travel of 5%RIWKHWRWDOÀDS travel set in FLAPERON

. Open the FLAP-TRIM function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to FLAP-TRIM

. The function is automatically activated with FLAPERON ; however, the default travel is 0

. Adjust the travel available to the flaperons when turning the CH6 DIAL .(Ex: 5% ). to 5%

. Optional: Use as total flap control. Reassign CH6 is primary control in AUX-CH WR\RXUGHVLUHGÀDSFRQWURO (Ex: right slider) to 50%

. **C** to AUX-CH

. **C** to CH6

. to Vr-E

. Close menu. Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49 and END POINTs : see p. 39. Set up AIRBRAKEmix: see p. 63 and ELEV-FLAPmix: see p. 62. 0L[ÀDSHURQ
VÀDSPRYHPHQWWRDQDGGLWLRQDOLQERDUGÀDSSOXJJH GLQWRDX[ see p. 61. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. (GLID) (ACRO)54 Using Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF )(ACRO  GLID 2A+1F GLID 2A+2F ):

$LOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDOLVSULPDULO\XVHGRQRUVHUYRZLQJVZ LWKRQHVHUYRVRSHUDWLQJLQERDUGÀDSVRQ&+RU&+ & CH6, and AILE-DIFFcontrolling proper aileron operation of 2 aileron servos, plugged into CH1 and CH7. The ailerons FDQQRWEHPRYHGOLNHÀDSVZKHQXVLQJ AILE-DIFF , except if using AIRBRAKE(see p. 63.) (Note that even if you make FLAPTRIM active while using AILE-DIFF , it will not have any effect. ONLY AIRBRAKEFRQWUROVWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWKH AILE-DIFF FRQ¿JXUDWLRQ >1RWH@:KHQFKDQJLQJWKHSRODULW\SRVLWLYHRUQHJDWLYHRIDU DWHLQFDPEHUÀDSFKDQJHUDWHGLU"LVGLVSOD\HGDV a check. Please set up after pressing DIALfor 1 second and canceling the alarm display. ( GLIDonly) )/$3IXQFWLRQDOORZV\RXWRVHWXSRUVHUYRVIRUÀDSDFWL RQ • The separate AILE-DIFFsettings for each condition can be set. ( GLID only) GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate twin aileronservos using AILDIFF

. Note that the function defaults to no difference in down travel vs. up travel. If you want differential travel, simply adjust each side. (Ex: 90%) Open the AIL-DIFFfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to AIL-DIFF

. * Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. 2SWLRQDO DGMXVWWKH XSGRZQWUDYHO separately for the two servos. (Ex: adjust to 90% .) **C** to AIL1

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. **C** to AIL2

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. Close menu. Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49 and END POINTs : see p. 39. Set up AIRBRAKEmix: see p. 63. Set up ELEV-FLAPPL[RQO\LIPRGHOKDVDÀDSVHUYRLQ&+VHHS Set up SNAP-ROLLFunction: see p. 59. View additional model setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. *If you receive an error message that OTHER WING MIXING IS ON , you must deactivate ELEVON or FLAPERON . See p. 51. (GLID 2A+1F GLID 2A+2F) (ACRO)55 Using Twin Aileron Servos, AILE-2(ACRO  GLID ): AILE-2only tells the radio that you are using CH5 and CH6 ( FLAPERON ), or CH5 and CH7 (AIL-DIFF ), not CH6 or CH7, as the second servo in FLAPERON or AILEDIFF . You still must activate and set up the FLAPERON  AILE-DIFFfunction.

Note that selecting CH6&5 or CH7&5 does NOT free up CH6 or CH7 to be used for other functions when using a receiver with more than 5 channels. Both 5 and 6 ( FLAPERON AILE-DIFF ) are dedicated to the FLAPERON or AILE-DIFFprogramming. >7KLVLVEHQH¿FLDOZLWKIRXUDLOHURQVHUYRVWKDWQHHGWRKDYHWKHLUHQGSRLQWVRUVXEWULPVVHWVHSDUDWHO\&+&+DQG CH6 are already fully set up to operate as ailerons. Mix CH7 or CH8 (the second aileron servo on the other side) into ailerons to function properly.]
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Adjust the second aileron servo output from CH6or7to channels CH6&5

. Allows twin aileron servo operation with a 5-channel receiver. Open the PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to PARAMETER

. Select AILE-2and change to CH6&5

. **C** to AILE-2

. to CH6&5

. Close menu. Where next? Finish setting up FLAPERON or AILE-DIFF . see Twin Aileron Servos: p. 51. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\56 Aircraft tail types (ACRO  GLID ): There are 4 basic tail types in aircraft models: • Simple. Model uses one elevator servo and one rudder servo (or multiple servos on a Y-harness). This is the default. • Dual Elevator servos. Model uses 2 elevator servos. see AILVATOR (ACRO ) see p. 57.

• Tail-less model. Model uses 2 wing servos together to create roll and pitch control. see ELEVON (ACRO  GLID 1A+1F ). see p. 56.

• V-TAIL . Model uses 2 surfaces, at an angle, together to create yaw and pitch control. see V-TAIL(ACRO  GLID ). see p. 58. Note: Only one of the three tail-type functions (AILEVATOR , V-TAIL , and ELEVON ) can be used at a time. The radio provides a ZDUQLQJDQGZLOOQRWDOORZWKHDFWLYDWLRQRIDQRWKHUWDLOW\SH XQWLOWKH¿UVWLVGHDFWLYDWHG$QHUURUPHVVDJHRI OTHER WING MIXING IS ON will display. (See the wing type example on page 51.) Using ELEVON (ACRO  GLID 1A+1F XVHGZLWKGHOWDZLQJVÀ\LQJZLQJVDQGRWKHUWDLOOHVVDLUFU DIWWKDWFRPELQHDLOHURQDQG HOHYDWRU IXQFWLRQV XVLQJWZR VHUYRV RQH RQ HDFK HOHYRQ7KH D LOHURQHOHYDWRU UHVSRQVHV RI HDFK VHUYR FDQ EH DGMXVWHG independently. This is also popular for ground model use, such as tanks, which drive two motors together for forward, and RQHPRWRUIRUZDUGRQHEDFNZDUGIRUWXUQLQJ Adjustability: • Requires use of CH1 and CH2. • Independently adjustable aileron travel allows aileron differential. • Independently adjustable elevator travel allows for differences in up vs. down

travel. • Separate ELEVON settings for each condition ( GLID only) [Note] When changing the polarity (positive or negative) of a rate, "change rate dir?" is displayed as a check. Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling the alarm display. ( GLID only) NOTE: If ELEVON is active, you cannot activate FLAPERON , AILE-DIFF , or AILEVATOR . An error message OTHER WING MIXING IS ON displays and you must deactivate the last function to activate ELEVON

. 127(%HVXUHWRPRYHWKHHOHYDWRUDQGDLOHURQVWLFNVWRIXOOG HÀHFWLRQGXULQJ setup. If large travels are specified, when the AILERON and ELEVATOR STICKS are moved at the same time the controls may bind or run out of travel. 

## ( For details on setting up a complex aerobatic plane, please visit www.futabarc.com\faq\. Many other setup examples are also available at this location. 

## ) GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate ELEVON

. Adjust aileron down travel to 90%of up travel, creating aileron differential. Open the ELEVON function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to ELEVON

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Optional: adjust the up/down travel separately for the servos as ailerons. (Ex: down to 90% .) **C** to AIL1

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. **C** to AIL2

. AILERON STICK
. to 90%

. Optional: adjust the elevator travel of each servo. (Ex: right servo elev. travel to 98%, left to 105% .) **C** to ELE2

. to 98%

. **C** to ELE1

. to 105%

. Close menu. Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49 and END POINTs : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq.html (GLID 1A+1F) (ACRO)57 Dual Elevator Servos (with a rudder) (AILEVATOR ) (ACRO ): Many models use two elevator servos, plugged in separate receiver channels. (Flying wings without a separate aileron control use ELEVON . V-shaped tail models use V-TAIL , p. 58.) %HQH¿WV • Ability to adjust each servo's center and end points for perfectly matched

travel. • Ease of assembly, not requiring torque rods for a single servo to drive 2

surfaces. (OHYDWRUVDFWLQJDOVRDVDLOHURQV IRUH[WUHPHVWXQWÀ\LQJRU PRUH UHDOLVWLFMHW

À\LQJRSWLRQDO • Redundancy, in case of a servo failure or mid-air collision. Adjustability: • CH2 and CH8 only. (With programmable mixing, could utilize CH5 as the 2nd elevator servo. See www.futaba-rc.com\

faq\ for examples.) THROTTLE-NEEDLEuses CH8 and cannot be active simultaneously. • Direction of each servo's travel may be reversed in REVERSEor the set percentages may be reversed here. • Elevator travels independently adjustable (both directions and percent). • Optional action as ailerons (defaults to 50% UHVSRQVH7KLV UHVSRQVHFDQQRW EHDFWLYDWHGGHDFWLYDWHGLQÀL JKW6HWWLQJ

AIL1 and 2to 0 disables this feature. Note: if you want this, but controlled with a switch, set AIL1 and 2to 0 here, and use 2 mixes . AIL-to-ELEV and AIL-to-AUX2OLQNWULPRIIDVVLJQDVZLWFKWRJHWDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPWKHHOHYDWRUVHUYRVZKHQ the assigned switch is on. See p. 68. )RUGHWDLOVRQVHWWLQJXSDFRPSOH[DHUREDWLFSODQHVXFKDVR QHZLWKZLQJVHUYRVIXOOVSDQDLOHURQVÀDSV AIRBRAKE / crow etc, please visit www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Many other setups are also available.) The AILEVATOR mixing function uses one servo on each of the two elevators, and combines the elevator function with the aileron function (unless aileron travel is set to 0 ). For aileron effect, the elevators are raised and lowered opposite of one another in conjunction with the ailerons. Once AILEVATOR is activated, unless you zero out the aileron values (see below), any time you move your ailerons or any programming moves your ailerons (ie. RUDDER-AILERON mixing), the radio automatically commands both elevator servos to also operate as ailerons. To deactivate this action, simply set the 2 aileron travel settings to 0 in the AILEVATOR function. This way the elevators will work only as elevators. ,IXVLQJWKHHOHYDWRUVDVDLOHURQVDVZHOOEHVXUHWRPRYHWKH HOHYDWRUDLOHURQVWLFNZKLOHFKHFNLQJWKHVHUYRPRWLRQV,ID ODUJHWUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUHPRYHGDWWKHVDPH WLPHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXWRIWUDYHO GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate twin elevator servos.Deactivate the elevator-acting-asailerons portion of this function. Note: Depending upon your model's geometry, you may need to reverse one servo or set a negative percentage here. Open the AILEVATOR function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to AILEVATOR

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Optional: adjust up/down travel when operating as ailerons. (Ex: 0 .) **C** to AIL3

. to 0%

. **C** to AIL4

. to 0%

. Optional: adjust total elevator travel of each servo. (Ex: right servo elevator travel to 98%, left to 96% .) **C** to ELE2

. to 98%

. **C** to ELE1

. to 96%

. Close menu. Where next? Adjust individual servo's SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49 and END POINTs : see p. 39. Set up Twin Aileron Servos: see p. 51. Set up AIRBRAKEmix: see p. 63.58 Using V-TAIL(ACRO  GLID ): V-TAILmixing is used with v-tail aircraft so that both elevator and rudder functions are combined for the two tail surfaces. Both elevator and rudder travel can be adjusted independently on each surface.

NOTE : If V-TAILis active, you cannot activate ELEVON or AILEVATOR functions. If one of these functions is active, an error message will be displayed and you must deactivate the last function prior to activating ELEVON . See the wing example on page 51. NOTE : Be sure to move the elevator and rudder sticks regularly while checking the servo motions. If a large value of WUDYHOLVVSHFL¿HGZKHQWKHVWLFNVDUHPRYHGDWWKHVDPHWLPH WKHFRQWUROVPD\ELQGRUUXQRXWRIWUDYHO'HFUHDVHWKH travel until no binding occurs. Adjustability: • Requires use of CH2 and CH4. • Independently adjustable travels allow for differences in servo travels. • Rudder differential is not available. (To create rudder differential, set RUD1 and 2to 0 . Next, use two programmable

mixes, RUD-ELEand RUD-RUD , setting different percentages for up and down. These are your new rudder travels. Trim and link off, switch assignment null so you can’t accidentally turn off rudder. See PROG.MIX , p. 68.) (For details on setting up a complex plane, such as one with a v-tail AND a separate steerable nosewheel, please visit our FAQ at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Many other setup examples are also available at this location.) GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate V-TAIL

. Adjust left elevator servo to 95%travel to match to right servo's travel. Open the V-TAILfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to V-TAIL

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. optional: adjust the travels separately for the 2 servos as elevators. (Ex: set left to 95% .) **C** to ELE1 . to 95%

. Repeat as necessary for other servos. Close menu. Where next? Adjust END POINTs : see p. 32 and SUB-TRIMs : see p. 49. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up ELEV-FLAPmix: see p. 62. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.59 6QDS5ROOVDWWKHÀLFNRIDVZLWFK SNAP-ROLL ) (ACRO ): 7KLV IXQFWLRQDOORZV \RXWRH[HFXWH VQDS UROOV E\ÀLSSLQJD VZL WFK SURYLGLQJ the same input every time. It also removes the need to change dual rates on the 3 channels prior to performing a snap, as SNAP-ROLLalways takes the servos to the same position, regardless of dual rates, inputs held during the snap, etc.

Note: Every aircraft snaps differently due to its C.G., control throws, moments, etc. Some models snap without aileron; others snap on elevator alone. Most models snap most precisely with a combination of all 3 surfaces. Additionally, rate of speed and acceleration when using the snap switch will affect how the model snaps. For information on using gyros with airplanes for cleaner precision maneuvers, such as snaps and spins without over rotation, see p. 74. Adjustability:

• Travel: Adjust the amount of elevator, aileron and rudder travel automatically applied.

• Range: -120 to +120 on all 3 channels. Default is 100%of range of all 3 channels.

• Directions: 8SWRVHSDUDWHVQDSVPD\EHVHWXSRQHIRUHDFKRIWKHGL UHFWLRQFKRLFHVXSULJKWGRZQULJKWXSOHIW

GRZQOHIW(DFKVQDSLVIXOO\DGMXVWDEOHUHJDUGLQJWUDYHOVDQG GLUHFWLRQRQHDFKRIWKHFKDQQHOV Note: for simplicity, the radio refers to snaps that use “UP” or positive elevator as “U” or “UP” snaps. This is more commonly referred to as a positive or inside snap. “D” or “DOWN” snaps are more commonly referred to as negative or outside snaps.

• R/U = Right positive R/D = Right negative L/U = Left positive L/D = Left negative snap roll • Assignment of the 2 switches ( DIR-SW1/2 ) to change snap directions is fully adjustable and optional. If you wish to have

only one snap, leave the switches as NULL . (If assigned, SW1  XSGRZQ SW2 OHIWULJKW • Caution: it is critical that you remember if you assigned switches to select the three additional snaps. • For example, assign SWITCH A  IRU8' VQDS GLUHFWLRQ DQGWKHQ DOVR DVVLJQ SWITCH A for elevator dual rates.

:KLOHÀ\LQJRQHOHYDWRUORZUDWH SWITCH A DOWN ) you pull your snap SWITCH . The model will: •use the throws set in the snap programming (the low rate elevator has no effect); and EHDGRZQQHJDWLYHRXWVLGHVQDSQRWDQXSSRVLWLYHLQVLGH VQDS •Both of these may come as a great surprise and risk crashing if you are unprepared. • Safety Switch ( SAFE-MOD ): a safety may be set up on your landing gear SWITCH , preventing accidental snap rolls while the landing gear is down. The safety switch is turned on and off with the landing gear SWITCH
. • ON : the safety mechanism is activated when the landing gear SWITCH is in the same position when this feature

is changed to ON . Snap rolls will not be commanded even if the snap roll SWITCH is turned on with the gear SWITCH in this position. When the landing gear SWITCH is moved to the opposite position, snap rolls may be commanded.

• OFF : activates the safety mechanism in the opposite position from the ON function.

• FREE : the safety mechanism is completely turned off. Snaps can be commanded regardless of the gear SWITCH

POSITION
. Note: The location of the safety switch always follows channel 5. If channel 5 is reassigned to switch C, for example, switch C is now the safety. If channel 5 is nulled or used as the second aileron servo, the safety function will not be available. • Trainer Safety: SNAP-ROLLis automatically disabled when the trainer function is activated.60 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate SNAP-ROLL . Adjust elevator travel to 55% , rudder travel to 120%in WKHULJKWXSVQDS$FWLYDWH SAFE-MOD so snaps can not be performed when gear is down. $GMXVW UXGGHUWUDYHOLQWKHOHIWGRZQ snap to 105%

. (Note: using negative percents can change any of the 4 snap directions. For example, change snap 1 to "down" by changing the elevator percent to -100% .) Open the SNAP-ROLLfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to SNAP-ROLL

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFFor ON

. Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: elevator to 55% , rudder to 120% .) **C** to ELEV

. to 55%

. **C** to RUDD

. to 120%

. Optional: Activate SAFE-MOD . [Ex: ON when SWITCH E(10CAG) or G

(10CHG) is down, meaning snap function is deactivated when that switch is in the down position.] E or G up. **C** to SAFE-MODE to ON

. snap switch. Notice MIX reading is still OFF

. E

or G down. Notice MIX reading changes to ON

. Optional: Assign switches to up/down and left/right. (Ex: Change to the left/ down snap and adjust rudder to 105% .) **C** to SW1

. to A
. **C** to SW2

. to B
. A down Bdown. Repeat steps above to set percentages. Close menu. Where next? Set up programmable mixes: see p. 61. View additional setups on the internet:www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.61 MIXES: the backbone of nearly every function Mixes are special programs within the radio that command one or more channels to act together with input from only one source, such as a stick, slider or knob. There are a variety of types of mixes. Types:

• Linear: Most mixes are linear. A 100% linear mix tells the slave servo to do exactly what the master servo is doing, using

100% of the slave channel’s range to do so. An example is FLAPERON ZKHQDLOHURQVWLFNLVPRYHGWKHÀDSVHUYRLVWROG to move exactly the same amount. A 50% linear mix would tell the slave servo, for example, to move to 50% of its range when the master’s control is moved 100%. (see p. 52.)

• Offset: An OFFSETPL[LVDVSHFLDOW\SHRIOLQHDUPL[:KHQWKHPL[LVWXUQHGRQXVXDOO\DÀLSRIDVZLWFKWKHVODYH

servo is moved a set percent of its range. An example of this is AIRBRAKE PRYLQJÀDSVÀDSHURQVDQGHOHYDWRUDOOWRD VHWSRVLWLRQDWWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFKVHHS

• Curve: Curve mixes are mostly used in helicopters, but may also be used in airplanes and gliders. An example is

THROTTLE-NEEDLEmixing, where the in-flight needle’s servo is moved, changing the mixture, as the throttle servo is moved. (see p. 65.) • Delay: Delay mixes are part of a few very special functions that make the servo move to its desired range more slowly.

THROTTLE DELAY (simulates turbine engines, p. 66) and the elevator delay in AIRBRAKEare two examples of this (see p. 62). DELAY in HELI (see p. 103) is another example that slows the servo movement to the trim settings for the other conditions. (VVHQWLDOO\HYHU\IHDWXUHLQWKHUDGLR¶VSURJUDPPLQJLVUHDOO\ DPL[ZLWKDOODVVLJQPHQWVSURJUDPPLQJVHWXSDQGUHDG\ to use. Additionally, the 10CG ACRO and GLID programs both provide 4 linear and 4 curve fully-programmable mixes ( HELI SURYLGHVOLQHDUDQGFXUYHWKDWDOORZ\RXWRVHWXSVSHFLD OPL[HVWRUHVROYHÀLJKWGLI¿FXOWLHVDFWLYDWHDGGLWLRQDO functions, etc. Let’s look quickly at a few examples that are features we’ve already covered. This may help to clarify the mix types and the importance of mixes. Additional examples: • Exponential is a preprogrammed curve mix that makes the servo's response more (+) or less (-) sensitive around center

stick (works in conjunction with dual rate, a linear mix that adjusts the total range). see D/R , EXP , p. 42.

• IDLE-DOWN and THR-CUTare two OFFSETpre-programmed mixes. These tell the throttle servo, when below a certain point,

to move toward idle an additional set percentage to help close the carburetor. see p. 40.

• ELEV-TO-FLAPPL[LQJLV D SUHSURJUDPPHGOLQHDUPL[WRPRYHWKH ÀDSV SURSRUW LRQDOO\WR HOHYDWRU FRQWURO KHOSLQJWKH

model loop even tighter than it can on elevator alone. (see p. 62.)

• THROTTLE-NEEDLEmixing is a curve mix (like PROG.MIX 5 to 8 IRUSURSHULQÀLJKWQHHGOHVHWXSVHHS

• THROTTLE DELAY mixing is a pre-programmed delay mix that slows down the response of the CH3 servo. (see p. 66.) Next, we'll get anin-depth look at some pre-programmed mixes ( PL[HVZKRVH FKDQQHOV DUH S UHGH¿QHG E\ )XWDEDIRU simplicity) we’ve not covered yet, and last, look at the fully-programmable mix types.62 ELEV-FLAP mixing (ACRO  GLID ): ELEV-FLAPPL[LQJLVWKH¿UVWSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[ZH
OOFRYHU7KLVPL[PDNHV WKH ÀDSV GURS RU ULVH ZKHQHYHUWKH ELEVATOR STICK is moved. It is most commonly used to make tighter pylon turns or squarer corners in maneuvers. In PRVWFDVHVWKHÀDSVGURRSDUHORZHUHGZKHQXSHOHYDWRULVFR PPDQGHG Adjustability:

• Rate   IXOO XS ÀDSWR  IXOO GRZQ ÀDS ZLWK D GHIDXOW R I 

RQHKDOIRIWKHÀDSUDQJHLVDFKLHYHG when the ELEVATOR STICK is pulled to provide full up elevator.)

• Switch : fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38. *IF you set it to NULL , the mix does not work. (ACRO )
• Range( GLID ): The range that mixing does not work near neutral of an elevator

stick can be set up. Hold the stick to the desired point (upper or lower side) , then press DIAL and

hold one second to set the range.

• Condition ( GLID ): Separate ELEV-FLAPsettings for each condition can be set. (ACRO )

( GLID )

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate ELEV-FLAPmixing. Adjust flap travel to 0%ÀDSVZLWKQHJDWLYHHOHYDWRU (push) and 45% flaps with positive elevator. Open the ELEV-FLAPfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to ELEV-FLAP

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: 0% ,to 45% .) **C** to RATE

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to 0%

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to 45%

. Close menu. Where next? $GMXVWÀDSHURQV
ÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOH FLAPERON ): see p. 52. Set up AIRBRAKE FURZEXWWHUÀ\VHHS Set up programmable mixes (ex: FLAP-ELEVATOR ): see p. 68. View additional setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.63 AIRBRAKE BUTTERFLY (crow) mixing (ACRO  GLID ):

Like FLAPERON and AILEVATOR , AIRBRAKEis one function that is really made up of a series of pre-programmed mixes all done for you within the radio. AIRBRAKE (often called "crow" or BUTTERFLY - see GLID , p. 80 for details) simultaneously PRYHVWKHÀDSVLILQVWDOOHGWZLQDLOHURQVLILQVWDOOHGDQGHOHYDWRUVDQGLVXVXDOO\XVHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWVRUW R limit increases in airspeed in dives. 7KLVIXQFWLRQLVRIWHQXVHGHYHQRQPRGHOVZLWKRXWÀDSVDVDQH DV\ZD\WRXVHWKHÀDSHURQVDQG FLAP-ELEVATOR mixing together. Adjustability:

• Activation: Proportional by moving the THROTTLE STICK RUVHWSRVLWLRQVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFK

• Switch: Mix SWITCH is selectable. *Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.
• Linear (Inversely proportional to THROTTLE STICK ): provides a proportional increase in amount of AIRBRAKE action as THROTTLE STICK is lowered and assigned switch is on. Provides gradually more AIRBRAKEas you slow the engine. Includes selectable stick position where AIRBRAKEbegins, gradually increasing to the same setting as the THROTTLE STICK is lowered. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly proportional to throttle stick, you will need to reverse the THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick direction for all models. See page 38 for instructions.

• Offset : Provides AIRBRAKEresponse immediately upon switch movement, going to a pre-set travel on each active channel

ZLWKRXWDQ\PHDQVRILQÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQW • During Airbrake operation, the elevator travel is displayed on the elevator trim display in the Startup screen.

• Delayed reaction : You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when AIRBRAKE BUTTERFLY is activated by setting the delay ( delay-ELEVLWHPWR VORZ GRZQWKH HOHYDWRU UHVSRQVH DOORZLQJWKH ÀDSVD LOHURQVHOHYDWRUWR DOO reach their desired end point together. A setting of 100%slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the prescribed distance. ( GLID : B.FLY-ELEV function)

• $GMXVWDEOHLQÀLJKW ACRO ) : Using the aileron (when AILE-DIFFor FLAPERON LVDFWLYDWHGDQGHOHYDWRUWULPOHYHULQÀLJKW can be set to adjust the aileron and elevator settings in your airbrake rather than adjusting the model's actual aileron and HOHYDWRUWULP7KLVDOORZVHDV\DGMXVWPHQWIRUDQ\EDOORRQLQJZKLOHLQÀLJKW:KHQWKHDLUEUDNHVZLWFKLVPRYHGWRRII the trims are again adjusting the normal elevator trim.

• Channels controlled(OHYDWRUVWZLQDLOHURQVDQGÀDSVPD\EHVHWLQGHSHQGHQWO\LQ AIRBRAKE , including set to 0 to

have no effect.

• Twin aileron servos: If FLAPERON , ELEVON and AIL-DIFFfunctions are inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2settings will have no

effect.

• If FLAPERON is active, the travel of the ailerons can be independently adjusted for the servos plugged into CH1 and

&+7KHÀDSFKRLFHKDVQRHIIHFWRQWKHÀDSHURQV • If AIL-DIFFis active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted. • Normally both ailerons are raised equally in AIRBRAKE , and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when

the ailerons rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique characteristics of the model. Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in AIRBRAKE  BUTTERFLY . Along with creating an enormous amount of drag (desireble for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where the ailerons are, and cncourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops", FRQVLGHUUDLVLQJWKHDLOHURQVDQGGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVLQVWHDGDV VKRZQLQWKHGLDJUDPDERYH ( GLID ) (ACRO )64 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate AIRBRAKE on a FLAPERON

. model. Adjust the flaperon travel to 75% ,with negative elevator (push) of 25%

. &RQ¿UP FLAPERON is active. see FLAPERON instructions. Open the AIRBRAKEfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to AIRBRAKE

. Activate the function. Switch C in up position. **C** to MIX

. to OFF

. Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex:Ailerons each 75% , Elevator -25% .) **C** to AIL1

. to 75%

. **C** to ELEV

. to -25%

. **C** to AIL2

. to 75%

. Optional: delay how quickly the elevator servo responds. **C** to delay- ELEV

. to 25%

. Optional: change the mixing from full amount upon switch to proportional to the THROTTLE STICK 's proximity to idle. **C** to MODE . to Linear( 0% ). THROTTLE STICK to desired 0 point. for 1 sec, until beeps (display changes if new setting is different from prior setting). Close menu. Where next? $GMXVWÀDSHURQV
WRWDOÀDSWUDYHODYDLODEOH FLAPERON ): see p. 52. Set up ELEV-FLAPmixing: see p. 62. Set up programmable mixes, for example, FLAP-ELEVATOR : see p. 67. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. •Twin elevator servos: • If AILEVATOR is active, the AIL1 and AIL2settings still only affect FLAPERON or AIL-DIFFservos, NOT the elevator servos.

(they would have the AIL3 and AIL4settings.)65 THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing (ACRO  HELI ):

THROTTLE-NEEDLELVDSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[WKDWDXWRPDWLFDOO\PRYHVDQLQÀLJKWP L[WXUHVHUYR&+LQUHVSRQVHWRWKH THROTTLE STICK inputs for perfect engine tuning at all throttle settings. This function is particularly popular with FRQWHVW SLORWV ZKR À\LQ DODUJH YDULHW\ RIORFDWLRQV QHHGLQJ UHJXODU HQJLQHWXQLQJ DGMXVWPHQWV DQG UHTXLULQJ SHUIHFW HQJLQHUHVSRQVHDWDOOWLPHVDQGLQDOOPDQHXYHUV$OVRSRSXODU WRPLQLPL]HÀRRGLQJDWLGOHRILQYHUWHGHQJLQHLQVWDOODWLRQV or installations with a high tank position. Not needed for fuel injection engines, which do this automatically. Adjustability: • Five-point curve allows adjustment of engine mixture at varied throttle settings. 7KHLQÀLJKWPL[WXUHVHUYRPXVWFRQQHFWWRUHFHLYHU&+ ,QÀLJKWPL[WXUHVHUYRPD\DOVREHXVHGDVDVHFRQGVHUYRIRU WXQLQJDWZLQ 7KURWWOHFXWIHDWXUHDOVRPRYHVWKHLQÀLJKWQHHGOHVHUYR • The CH8 knob adjusts the high throttle mixture (may be deactivated. see AUX-CH ). • Because both use CH8, this function cannot be used simultaneously with AILEVATOR

. • An acceleration (ACCE ) function (ACRO only) helps the engine compensate for sudden, large amounts of throttle input by

making the mixture suddenly richer, then easing it back to the proper adjustment for that throttle setting. This function UHTXLUHVVRPHDGMXVWPHQWWREHVW¿W\RXUHQJLQHDQG\RXUÀ\LQJ VW\OH$GMXVWHQJLQH¶VUHVSRQVHXQWLOQRKHVLWDWLRQRFFXUV on rapid throttle input. • Separate curves are available ( HELI only) for normal, idle-ups 1 and 2 combined, and idle-up 3. Immediately below MIX

the radio displays the curve you are editing; ex: >NORML ; and then which condition is currently active by your switches ex: ( ID1/2 ). Note that you can edit the mix for a dif ferent condition without being in that condition, to allow editing without having to shut off the helicopter’s engine every time. Be sure you are editing the proper curve by checking the name after the > and not the one in parentheses. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate THROTTLE-NEEDLE mixing. Adjust the points as follows to resolve a slight lean midrange problem: 1: 40% 2: 45% 3: 65% 4: 55% 5: 40% Open the THROTTLE-NEEDLEfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to page 2. **C** to THROTTLE-NEEDLE

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. HELI only. Select the condition to edit. **C** to MIX

. to ACT . as needed. Adjust the travels as needed to match your engine by slowly moving the stick to each of the 5 points, then adjusting the percentage at that point until the engine is properly tuned. **C** to POINT-

. THROTTLE STICK to POINT1

. to 40%

. until POINT 2is highlighted. to 45%

. to POINT 3

. to 65%

. to POINT 4

. to 55%

. to POINT 5

. to 40% ( HELI ) (ACRO )66 Throttle delay function THR-DELAY (ACRO ): The THR-DELAY function is used to slow the response of the throttle servo to simulate the slow response of a turbine engine. A 40%delay setting corresponds to about a one-second delay, while a 100%delay takes about eight seconds to respond. For helicopters, see DELAYS , p. 103.

This function may also be used to create a “slowed servo” on a channel other than throttle. This is accomplished by plugging the desired servo (Ex: gear doors) into CH3 ( THR ), throttle into an auxiliary channel such as 8, and then using VRPHFUHDWLYHPL[HV3OHDVHVHHRXU)UHTXHQWO\$VNHG4XHVWLRQV DUHDDWZZZIXWDEDUFFRP?IDT?IRUWKLVVSHFL¿FH[DPSOH
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate THR-DELAY for a ducted-fan replica of a turbine-powered aircraft. Slow the servo response byone second. Open the THR-DELAY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to page 2. **C** to THR-DELAY

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Adjust the RATEto match the desired servo speed. (Ex: 40% .) **C** to RATE

. to 40%

. Close menu. Where next? Set up THROTTLE-NEEDLEmixing: see p. 65. Adjust throttle’s END POINT : see p. 39. Adjust throttle exponential ( D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up AILEVATOR : see p. 57. Set up programmable mixes, for example, RUDDER-AILERON : see p. 68. View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\ ACRO only. Optional: increase mixturewhen throttle is applied rapidlyACCE .(see above for details.) **C** to ACCE

. THROTTLE STICK to idle. THROTTLE STICK full open quickly. as needed. HELI o n l y : s e t c u r v e s f o r o t h e r conditions. **C** to condition name. to next condition to edit. Repeat above steps as needed. Close menu.67 Throttle curve (THR-CURVE )(ACRO ): This function adjust the throttle operation curve for optimum engine response to throttle stick movement. NOTE: If the throttle EXPfunction is activated, you can not use THR-CURVE function simultaneously.
Adjustability: • Separate curves for each switch position are available.

• Moving and deleting the curve point : The curve point ( -stk- ) can be moved to the left or right by turning the DIAL (up to

LQIURQWRIWKHDGMRLQLQJSRLQWDQGGHOHWHGUHWXUQHGE\SUH VVLQJWKH DIAL for one second alternately. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Base point: Adjust base point of throttle curve until engine idles reliably. -out- : output, servo position. -stk- : curve point, stick position. Open the THR-CURVEfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to THR-CURVE

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ON

. $GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW **C** to point 1 ( -out- ). to desired throttle servo position. Optional: Assign the switch. **C** to SW

. to desired switch. Optional: Move the curve point. (Ex: point 3) **C** to point 3 ( -stk- ). to desired curve point to move to left or right. Optional: Delete the curve point. And return the curve point. (Ex: point 3) **C** to point 3 ( -stk- ). for one second to delete the curve point.

**C** to point 3 ( -stk- ). for one second to return. Next point: Adjust the next point. Repeat as needed. Close.68 LINEAR PROGRAMMABLE MIXES ( PROG.MIX1-4 ):

Sample reasons to use linear programmable mixes: • To correct bad tendencies of the aircraft (such as rolling in response to rudder input). • To operate 2 or more servos for a single axis (such as two rudder servos). 7RDXWRPDWLFDOO\FRUUHFWIRUDSDUWLFXODUDFWLRQVXFKDVORZ HULQJHOHYDWRUZKHQÀDSVDUHORZHUHG 7RRSHUDWHDVHFRQGFKDQQHOLQUHVSRQVHWRPRYHPHQWLQD¿UVW FKDQQHOVXFKDVLQFUHDVLQJWKHDPRXQWRIVPRNHRLOLQ response to more throttle application, but only when the smoke switch is active). 7RWXUQRIIUHVSRQVHRIDSULPDU\FRQWUROLQFHUWDLQFLUFXPVW DQFHVVXFKDVVLPXODWLQJRQHHQJLQHÀDPLQJRXWRQDWZLQ

or throttle-assisted rudder turns, also with a twin). Adjustability: • Defaults: The 4 programmable mixes default to the most frequently used mixes for simplicity. If you want to use one of

these mixes, simply select that mix number so that the master and slave servos are already selected for you.

• PROG.MIX1 aileron-to-rudder for coordinated turns

• PROG.MIX2HOHYDWRUWRÀDSIRUWLJKWHUORRSV HELI mixes default to elev-to-pitch.)

• PROG.MIX3 ÀDSWRHOHYDWRUWRFRPSHQVDWHSLWFKLQJZLWKÀDSV HELI mixes default to pitch-to-elev.)

• PROG.MIX4throttle-to-rudder ground handling compensation

• Channels available to mix: All four mixes may use any combination of CH1-8. (CH9-10 are not proportional and cannot

be mixed.) Offset and dials may also be set to the master channels. (see below.)

• Master: the controlling channel. The channel whose movement is followed by the slave channel.

• Another channel: Most mixes follow a control channel. (Ex: rudder-to-ailerons, 25%, no switch, corrects roll

coupling.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET RUDD AILE ON OFF ANY NULL 25% 0

• Offset as master: To create an OFFSETPL[VHWWKHPDVWHUDV2)67 ([PRYHÀDSHURQVDVÀDSVRI WKHLUWRWDO throw when SWITCH C is in down position.) MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET OFST FLAP ON 1$ C DOWN 20% 0

• Dial as master: To directly effect one servo’s position by moving a dial, set the master as the desired dial.

(Ex: create a second throttle trim on left slider.)

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET

VR(D) THRO OFF 1$ ANY NULL 5% 0

• Slave: the controlled channel. The channel that is moved automatically in response to the movement of the master

channel. The second channel in a mix’s name (i.e. aileron-to-rudder).

•Link: link this programmable mix with other mixes.

Ex: PMIX FLAP-ELEVATOR PL[LQJWRFRUUHFWIRUEDOORRQLQJZKHQÀDSVDUHORZHUHGEXWPR GHOKDVD9WDLO:LWKRXW LINK , Your 10CG contains four separate linear programmable mixes. (Note that mixer #5-8’s mixing RATEsare set with a 5-point curve. HELI has mixer #5-6's mixing. see CURVE MIXES, p. 71.) There are a variety of reasons you might want to use these mixes. A few are listed here. All of the adjustable parameters are listed below, but don’t let them VFDUH\RX)RU\RXU¿UVW IHZWLPHVH[SHULPHQWLQJZLWKPL[HVMX VWWXUQRQWKH default mixes, adjust them how you think they need to be, then use the servo screen to check and see if you were correct. As with all functions, a sample setup follows, step by step, to assist you.69 WKLVPL[RQO\PRYHV&+HOHYDWRUZKHQÀDSLVFRPPDQGHGUHVXOWL QJLQDGDQJHURXVFRPELQDWLRQRI\DZDQGUROO:LWK LINK ON , mixing is applied to both CH2 and CH4. MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET FLAP ELEV ON OFF ANY NULL 5% 0

• Trim: master’s trim affects slave. Not displayed if master is not CH 1-4, because 5-9 have no trim. Ex: two rudder servos.

With TRIM OFF , rudder trim would bind the two servos. TRIM ON resolves this.

• On/off choices:

• SWITCH: Any of the positions of any of the 8 switches may be used to activate a mix. Up&Cntr , Cntr&Dn options

allow the mix to be ON in 2 of the 3 positions of a 3-position SWITCH
. • NULL : No SWITCH can turn this mix OFF . This mix is active at all times.

• LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.

• STk-THR 7XUQHGRQRIIE\ THROTTLE STICK PRYHPHQW7ULJJHUSRLQWGLUHFWLRQDUHVHOHFWDEOH([ OFST -to-(gear doors) mix to open gear doors at idle, which is only active if throttle is below half.

MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET OFST AUX2 OFF NO STK-THR Stick at 1/2, for 1 sec. 100% 0

• Rate: the percentage of the slave’s range it will move upon maximum input from the master channel. Ex: RUDDER

AILERON PL[$LOUDQJH  ́:KHQUXGGHULVPRYHGIXOOULJKWDLOHU RQVPRYH ́ MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET RUDD AILE OFF OFF ANY NULL 50% 0

• Offset: Offsets the slave’s center relative to the master. Ex: Smoke valve opens wider per throttle servo position when smoke SWITCH is ON . Smoke servo’s neutral is moved down from THROTTLE STICK center to the bottom. MASTER SLAVE LINK TRIM SWITCH POSITION RATE OFFSET THRO AUX2 OFF OFF E DOWN 100% 100%70 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a FLAP-ELEV mix: ON when SWITCH C is in the down position. 1RHOHYDWRUPRYHPHQWZKHQÀDSVPRYH up (spoilers), 5% elevator movement when flaps move down, LINK should be ON if model has twin elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK remains OFF

. (Flap has no trim lever, so TRIM is not an option.) Open an unused programmable mix. (Ex: use PROG.MIX3 since it is already set-up for FLAP-ELEVATOR .) for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to PROG.MIX-

. **C** to 3 >

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ON

. Choose master and slave channels. (Ex: no need to change MASTER/SLAVE .) already CH6 already CH2 Optional: set Master as OFSTor VR(A-E)

. See above for details. **C** to MASTER

. to desired choice. Set LINK and TRIM as needed. (Ex: leave LINK OFF , TRIM not available.) Assign SWITCH and position. (Ex: change from Eto C , DOWN .) **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. Optional: set switch to STk-THR to activate mix with THROTTLE STICK

. (See above for details.) **C** to SW

. to STk-THR

. **C** to POSI

. THROTTLE STICK to desired point. for 1 second to set. Optional: set switch position to NULL

. Makes mix active at all times. Not compatible with STk-THR

. **C** to POSI

. to NULL

. Set rates. (Ex: Lo= 0% , Hi= 5% .) **C** to RATE

. VR(A) past center. Leave at 0%

. VR(A) past center. to 5%

. Set OFFSET , if needed. (Ex: 0 .) **C** to OFFSET . Leave at 0%

. Close menu. Where next? Adjust servo END POINTs : see p. 39. 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up additional programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER

- AILERON : see p. 68. View numerous additional mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\ Other Examples:

• RUD-ELEV (ACRO  GLID ) mix: Compensate for pitching up or down when rudder is applied.

• AIL-RUD mix (ACRO ): Coordinate turns by applying rudder automatically with aileron input. All model types.

• ELEV-PIT( HELI ) mix: compensate for the loss of lift of tilting the model.71 CURVE PROGRAMMABLE MIXES ( PROG.MIX5-8 )( HELI : PROG.MIX5-6 ):

Your 10CG’s ACRO  GLID programs contain four separate curve programmable mixes. HELI contains two. There are a variety RIUHDVRQV\RXPLJKWZDQW FXUYHPL[HV)RU H[DPSOHZKHQDOLQH DUPL[GRHVQ¶W¿W\RXU QHHGVDORQJWKH ZKROHUDQJH2QH pre-programmed curve mix is the THROTTLE-NEEDLEfunction. This curve is adjustable at 5 points, allowing you to adjust the motor’s tuning at 5 points along its RPM range. One programmable curve mix defaults to RUDDER-AILERON . A linear mix that keeps the model from rolling in knife-edge is SUREDEO\WRRPXFKDLOHURQZKHQUXGGHU LVDSSOLHGLQOHYHOÀLJKW &UHDWHDFXUYHPL[DQGVHW DOOSRLQWVWRPDWFKWKHOLQHDU mix. Inhibit the linear mix, then adjust the curve to get the right response all along the rudder channel’s travel. $GMXVWDELOLW\IRUGHWDLOHGGH¿QLWLRQVVHH/LQHDU3URJUDPPDEOH0L[HVDQG*ORVVDU\

• ACRO  GLID Defaults: The 4 programmable curve mixes default to the most frequent choices, but can be set to any channel.

• PROG.MIX5 rudder-to-aileron for roll coupling compensation ( GLID mixes default to aileron-to-elev.)

• PROG.MIX6 rudder-to-aileron for roll coupling compensation ( GLID mixes default to aileron-to-elev.)

• PROG.MIX7rudder-to-elevator for pitch coupling compensation ( GLID mixes default to elevator-to-airbrake.)

• PROG.MIX8 rudder-to-elevator for pitch coupling compensation ( GLID mixes default to elevator-to-airbrake.)

• HELI Defaults:

• PROG.MIX5 aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns

• PROG.MIX6 aileron-to-elevator for coordinated turns

• Master: The controlling channel can only be a channel. Cannot be OFFSETor dial.

• Trim: not available in curve mixes.

• Offset: not available in curve mixes.72 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a RUDD-ELEVcurve mix on a model that pitches down severely at full rudder and not at all with minimal rudder input, and pitches worse on right rudder than left: Point 1: 25% Point 2: 8% Point 3: 0% Point 4: 10% Point 5: 28% ON when SWITCH C is down. LINK should be ON if model has twin elevator servos. Otherwise, LINK remains OFF

. (Note that point 3 is 0%. Otherwise,the elevator would be retrimmed when the mix is active and no rudder input is given.) Open an unused curve programmable mix. (Ex: use PROG.MIX7since it is already set-up for RUDDER-ELEV .) for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to PROG.MIX-

. **C** to 7 >

. Activate the function. to page 2. **C** to MIX

. to ON

. Choose master and slave channels. (Ex: do not change MASor SLV). already RUDD already ELEV Set LINK as needed. (Ex: off) Assign SWITCH and position. (Ex: change from Fto C , DOWN .) **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. Optional: set switch to STk-THR to activate mix with THROTTLE STICK
. (See above for details.) **C** to SW

. to STk-THR

. **C** to POSI

. THROTTLE STICK to desired point. for 1 second to set. Optional: set switch position to NULL

. Makes mix active at all times. Not compatible with STk-THR

. **C** to POSI

. to NULL

. Set desired percent at the stick points. (Ex: listed at left.) to page 1. **C** to POINT-1

. to 25%

. Repeat for points 2-5. Close menu. Where next? Adjust servo END POINTs : see p. 39. Set up AILEVATOR : see p. 57. Set up linear programmable mixes, ex: RUDDER-to-Aux2 (twin rudder servos):see p. 68, or additional curve mix, ex: RUDDER-AILERON : see p. 71. View numerous mix setups: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\73 GYA gyro mixing GYA series gyros: GYA series gyros are a high performance, compact, and light weight AVCS gyro developed for model airplane. Integrated sensor and control circuit make it easy to mount. • GYA350: for airplane aileron, elevator, or rudder. • GYA351: for airplane ailerons, especially two servos such as when using FLAPERON

. • GYA352: for airplane aileron, elevator, or rudder control. Two of these surfaces (axis) can be controlled by GYA352. GYA series gyro operation modes: The GYA gyros have two operations modes: AVCS mode and Normal mode. • Normal mode: This mode performs general proportional control operation. For instance, it controls the gyro so that

changes are countered when the attitude of the aircraft is changed by cross-wind, etc. • AVCS mode: This mode performs both proportional and integrated control operation. The difference between Normal

mode and AVCS mode operation is that whereas the Normal mode only counters changes in attitude, the AVCS mode returns to the original controlled variable simultaneously with countering changes in attitude. For example, during knife HGJHÀ\LQJDLOHURQDQGHOHYDWRUFRPELQLQJ UXGGHULQSXWLVQRUP DOO\QHFHVVDU\EXWLQWKH$9&6PRGHDGGLQJ UXGGHU input is performed automatically by the gyro. Adjustability: • Plug the gyro's sensitivity adjustment to channel 5, 7, or 8 of the receiver.

(selectable) • Full switch assignability ( SWITCH A-H ) • Each rate setting may be set from 0 to NOR100% or AVC100% gain.

NOR : Normal mode gain. AVC : AVCS mode gain • Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness.

• MIX-1,2 : Two surfaces' sensitivity can be adjusted independently. Gyro gain adjustment: • When the servo hunts, the gyro gain is too high. Lower the gain until the hunting stops. 7KH J\UR ZLOO GLVSOD\ EHVW SHUIRUPDQFH DW D JDLQMXVW EHIRUH KXQWLQJ RFFXUV 3HUIRUP DGMXVWLQJ E\ À\LQJWKH DLUFUDIW

repeatedly. Precautions: • When taking off and landing, always switch to the Normal mode. Taking off and landing in the AVCS mode is dangerous. • We recommend that you use the rudder control gyro in the Normal mode. In the AVCS mode, rudder operation is

necessary when turning because the weathervane effect is lost. Use the gyro in the Normal mode unless you are an expert in rudder operation. • And we recommend that you also set to off (0%) mode for safety as follows. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a GYA gyro setting. (Ex: MIX-1) Open and activate the GYRO SENSE function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to GYRO SENSE

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX-1

. to ON

. Optional: change switch assignment. Ex: select E

. **C** to SW to E

. Adjust gyro rates as needed. (Ex: UP to NOR70% , CNTR to 0% (off) , DOWN to AVC70%as starting points.) **C** to gyro rate E

up. to NOR 70%

. ( 0% ). E

down. to AVC 70%

. Close menu.74 Special Additions, Functions, And Added Equipment Commonly Used On Powered Aircraft Gyros: -XVW DVWRUTXH URWDWHV DQ DLUFUDIW RQWKH UXQZD\ GXULQJWDNHRI I KHOLFRSWHUV VWUXJJOH ZLWKWRUTXHWZLVWLQJWKH model every time throttle is applied. For many years gyroscopes have been used on model helicopters to control this. In competition aerobatics and scale aircraft competition alike, the usefulness of gyros has recently come to light. For in-depth information on gyro types, please see p. 106. )RUDHUREDWLFVJ\URVRQUXGGHUDQGHOHYDWRU¿[RYHUURWDWLRQR IVQDSVDQGVSLQVDVZHOODVWDLOZDJJLQJLQVWDOOWXUQV)XWD ED offers a twin-axis gyro, GYA-352, that controls two axes with a single gyro.) For 3D aerobatics (below stall speed, such as WRUTXHUROOVKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URVRQUXGGHUDQGHOHYDWRUGUDPDWLFDOO\VLPSOLI\WKHVHPDQHXYHUV)RUVFDOHPRGHOV gyros are frequently used to simplify take-offs and landings by keeping the model straight during throttle application.  $OZD\V EH FDUHIXOLI XVLQJ D KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\UR DVLWZLO O FRUUHFW DQ\ FKDQJHLQ \DZWKDWLV QRW FDXVHG E\

PRYHPHQW RIWKH UXGGHU OLNHPDNLQJDWXUQZLWKMXVWDLOHURQDQ GHOHYDWRU7\SLFDOO\PRGHOHUV XVH KHDGLQJKROG $9&6VHWWLQJVRQO\IRUVSHFL¿FPDQHXYHUVVXFKDVWDNHRIIVDQG WRUTXHUROOVWKHQVZLWFKWRQRUPDOPRGHRU2))IRU WKHUHPDLQGHURIWKHÀLJKWWRDYRLGWKLVULVN Retracts: Retractable landing gear is often used on scale models for increased realism and on high performance models to decrease drag. The gear servo is typically plugged into CH5, which defaults to a 2-position switch for simplicity. Mechanical retracts require the use of a specialized non-proportional retract servo. Retract servos go from full travel one direction to full travel the other direction, then mechanically hold the gear into the locked position. A regular servo used for mechanical retracts will continue to draw full power the entire time, prematurely draining the battery and risking crash of your model. End point will not adjust a retract servo. Pneumatic (air driven) retracts use a standard servo to control an air valve which directs air into or out of the retract units , moving the gear up or down. Pneumatics are easier to install but require added maintenance of the air system. Gear Doors: Some scale models with retracts also have separate gear doors to cover the scale gear. For one example of how to operate the gear doors separately from the retracts, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Smoke Systems: Many scale and aerobatic models use smoke systems to provide increased realism or a more impressive GHPRQVWUDWLRQ7KHUH DUHPDQ\ VPRNH  V\VWHPV DYDLODEOH ZLWK YDU\LQJW\SHV RI FRQWURO0RVW XVH D VHUYRWRLQFUHDVH GHFUHDVHWKHÀRZRIVPRNHÀXLGLQWRWKHVSHFLDOL]HGVPRNHPXIÀH U7KHRLOLVKHDWHGLQWKHPXIÀHUFUHDWLQJVPRNH It is a good practice to set up a "safety" that shuts off the smoke oil if the throttle is lowered below half-stick. For a deta iled example of a smoke system setup, please visit our website: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\. Kill Switches: For safety reasons, it is strongly recommended that an electronic kill switch be installed in all gasolineSRZHUHGDLUFUDIW,QFDVHRIDQ\W\SHRILQÀLJKWSUREOHPVXFKDVSURSIDLOXUHH[KDXVWYLEUDWLQJRIIWKURWWOHVHUYRIDLOXUH  UDGLRLQWHUIHUHQFHWKHPRGHOHUFDQVKXWWKHHQJLQHRIITXLFNO\DQGVDIHO\LQÀLJKW$GGLWLRQDOO\)DLO6DIH)6VHWWLQJV DUHUHFRPPHQGHGWRVKXWWKHHQJLQHRIILQFDVHRIVXI¿FLHQWLQW HUIHUHQFHWRWULJJHUWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJV Lastly, an electronic kill switch set to "off" prior to the aircraft's power being shut off adds an additional safety should someone accidentally turn on the mechanical kill switch on the exterior of the model. Bomb Drops, Paratroopers, and other Released Items: Many sport and scale models include one or more of these fun addons. Typically, all are controlled by a simple micro-switch plugged into CH9 or CH10. The switch is assigned in AUX-CH

.75 GLIDER MODEL FUNCTIONS Please note that nearlyall of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane ( ACRO setup), sailplane ( GLID 1A+1F 2A+1F2A+2Fsetups), and helicopter ( HELI setups). The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter. The glider BASIC menu includes MOTOR CUTand does not include IDLE-DOWN or THR-CUT

. Note that in all cases where ACRO programming labels channel 3 as throttle, GLID programming labels channel 3 as ARB (airbrake), since airbrakes are normally operated on channel 3 in gliders. This includes STK-THR reading STK-ARB

.

GLIDER ( GLID(1A+1F)  (2A+1F)  (2A+2F) ) FUNCTIONS . 75 Table of contents........................................................ 75 Getting Started with a Basic 4-CH Glider ................ 76 GLIDER BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS .......................... 78 MOTOR CUT ................................................................ 79 MODELSubmenu: MODEL SELECT , COPY , NAME .......... 30 PARAMETER Submenu: RESET , MODUL , ATL , AILE-2 , CONTRAST , BACK-LIGHT , USER NAME , LOGIC SW ........ 33 Model type ( PARAMETER submenu) ........................... 78 Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38 END POINT .................................................................. 39 'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ) .......... 42 TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45 Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH ) ............................................................................. 46 TRAINER ..................................................................... 47 TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48 SERVO Display ........................................................... 49 Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe ( F/S ) ......................... 50 GLIDER ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ..................... 80 FLAPERON ................................................................... 52 FLAP TRIM .................................................................. 53 Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF ) ................................. 54 ELEVON (see tail types) ............................................... 56 ELEVON ....................................................................... 56 V-TAIL ......................................................................... 58 Linear, Prog. mixes1-4 ............................................. 68 Curve, Prog. mixes5-8 ............................................. 71 ELEV-FLAP .................................................................... 62 BUTTERFLY (modifyed version of AIRBRAKE ) ............. 63 BUTTERFLY ................................................................... 87 AILE/RUDD .................................................................. 81 AILE-FLAP( GLID(2A+2F) only) .................................... 82 SPOILER MIX ............................................................... 83 OFFSETs$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV ...................... 84 START DELAY ( GLID(1A+1F) only) ................................. 85 CAMBER MIX ............................................................... 85 CAMBER FLAP .............................................................. 86 Channel 3’s function selection( CONDITION/FUNCTION ) 8876 GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC 4-CHANNEL (Aileron/Flap/Rudder/Elevator) GLIDER This guideline is intended to help you get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction in how to do even more with this powerful system than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages: a big picture overview of what we’re trying to accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and a step-by-step instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model. For additional details on utilizing each function, see that function’s section in this manual—the page numbers are indicated LQWKH¿UVWFROXPQDVDFRQYHQLHQFHWR\RX GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Prepare your aircraft. Ins tall all servos, switches, receiver per your model’s instructions. Turn on transmitter then receiver; adjust all linkages so surfaces are nearly centered. Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up. Check servo direction and throws. Make notes now of what you will need to change during programming. Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your model. (Ex: GLID 1A+1F .) See p. 78. [NOTE: This is one of several functions that requires confirmation to make a change. Only critical changes such as a MODEL RESETrequire additional key strokes to accept the change.] In the BASIC menu, open the PARAMETER submenu. Turn on the transmitter. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) then **C** to highlight PARAMETER

. to choose PARAMETER

. Go to MODEL TYPE

. **C** to MODEL TYPE

. Select proper MODEL TYPE

. Ex: GLID(1A+1F)

. &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH Close the PARAMETER submenu. to GLID(1A+1F)

. for 1 second. Are you sure?Displays. WRFRQ¿UP to return to BASIC menu. NAME the model. P. 32. (Note that you do not need to do anything to "save" or store this data.) In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL submenu. **C** as needed to highlight MODEL

. to choose MODEL

. Go to MODEL NAME

. **C** to NAME

. (1 st

character of model’s name is highlighted.) Input aircraft’s name. Close the MODEL submenu when done. WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU When proper character is displayed,

**C** to move to next character and repeat. to return to BASIC menu. REVERSEservos as needed for proper control operation. P. 38. In the BASIC menu, open (servo) REVERSE

. **C** to REVERSE

. to choose REVERSE

. Choose desired servo and reverse its direction of travel. (Ex: reverse rudder servo.) **C** to CH4:RUDD

. so REV is highlighted. Are you sure?Displays. for 1 second. Repeat as needed. to return to BASIC menu.77 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Adjust travels as needed to match model’s recommended throws (usually listed as high rates).P. 39. In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT

. **C** to END POINT

. to choose END POINT

. Adjust the servos’ end points. ([ÀDSVHUYR Close the function. **C** to FLAP

. VR(A) until travel as desired. VR(A) . Repeat as needed. 6HW XS GXDOWULSOH UDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO ( D/R , EXP ) P. 42. (Note that in the middle of the left side of the screen is the name of the channel and the SWITCH position you are adjusting. Two or even three rates maybe set per channel by simply choosing the desired SWITCH and programming percentages with the SWITCH LQHDFKRILWVSRVLWLRQV Choose D/R , EXP

. **C** to D/R , EXP

. to choose D/R , EXP

. Choose the desired control, and set the first (Ex: high) rate throws and exponential. **C** to CH>

. to choose CH>2(elevator). A to up position. [Note screen reads ELEV (UP) ]

**C** to D/R

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set. (Normally the same for both directions.)

**C** to EXP

. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set. ELEVATOR STICK
. to set. Set the second (low) rate throws and exponential. **C** to D/R

. A to down position. Repeat above to set low rate. Optional: change dual rate SWITCH assignment. Ex: elevator to SWITCH G with 3 positions. **C** to SW

. to G

. G

to center position. Repeat steps above to set 3rd rate. 0RYHÀDSFRQWURO IURPWKH95$GLDO to the left slider [ VR(D) ]. (AUX-CH ) p. 46. In the BASIC menu, open AUX-CH

. **C** to AUX-CH

. to choose AUX-CH

. Choose CH6 ÀDS Change primary control to VR(D)
. Change other channels as needed. **C** to CH6

. to VR(D)

. Repeat as required. Return to the home screen. Where next? (Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.) TRAINER p. 47. Multiple wing or tail servos. See wing types and tail types: p. 51, 56. OFFSETS , BUTTERFLY (AIRBRAKEFURZDQGRWKHUSURJUDPPDEOHPL[HVS Retractable Gear, Smoke systems, kill switches, and other auxiliary channel setups: p. 46. Adjusting SUB-TRIMsto match servo centers: p. 49.78 $/22.$77+(5$',2
6 GLID -SPECIFIC FUNCTIONS STEP BY STEP. Those functions which are identical to the ACRO setups are referred directly to those pages. MODEL TYPE : This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used. GLIDER TYPES:

%HIRUHGRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXSDJOLGHURUVDLOSODQH¿UV W\RXPXVWGHFLGHZKLFK MODEL TYPEEHVW¿WV\RXUDLUFUDIW

• ACRO IRUVRPHDHUREDWLFVORSHJOLGHUV ACRO is a better choice because of functions it offers that the GLID types do not.

• ACRO provides:

• SNAP-ROLL , • AILEVATOR (twin elevator servo support),

• AIRBRAKE(a more assignable version of BUTTERFLY). • For nitro-powered sailplanes: IDLE-DOWN , THR-CUT , THROTTLE-NEEDLEmixing and THROTTLE DELAY programming. • But ACRO ODFNV SURJUDPPLQJ IRU IXOOVSDQ DLOHURQV DQG VHSDUDWH 2))6(7WULPV IRU HDFK ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ 1RUPDO

Start, Speed, Distance and Landing.

• GLID(1A+1F) : The GLID(1A+1F) MODEL TYPEis intended for sailplanes with one or two aileron servos (or none), and a single

ÀDS VHUYR RUWZRFRQQHFWHGZLWKD \FRQQHFWRU7KLV TYPEis meant to be a very simplistic version to set up a basic JOLGHUZLWKRXWDORWRIDGGHGIHDWXUHV$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLW LRQVDYDLODEOH

• GLID(2A+1F) : The GLID(2A+1F) MODEL TYPELVLQWHQGHGIRUVDLOSODQHVZLWKGXDODLOHURQVHUYRVDQGDVLQJ OHÀDSVHUYRRU

WZRFRQQHFWHGZLWKD\FRQQHFWRU$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOH7KHVHÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFRQWDLQGLIIHUHQWRIIVHW trims and aileron differentials to make the sailplane perform certain maneuvers more easily.

• GLID(2A+2F) : The GLID(2A+2F) MODEL TYPEsupports dual flap servos that can also act as ailerons, creating full-span

DLOHURQVDQGÀDSV$GGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOH7KHVH ÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVFRQWDLQGLIIHUHQWRIIVHWWULPVDQGDLOHURQ differentials to make the sailplane perform certain maneuvers more easily. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change model1 is MODEL TYPE to GLID(1A+1F)

. NOTE: This is one of the several functions that the radio requires FRQ¿UPDWLRQWRPDNHDFKDQJH Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (Ex: 1) On home screen, check model nameand number on top left. If it is not the correct model (Ex: 1), use MODEL SELECT , p. 25. Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Change the MODEL TYPE

. &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH **C** to TYPE

. to GLID(1A+1F)

. for one second. Are you sure?&RQ¿UPDWLRQGLVSOD\V WRFRQ¿UP Close. **GLID(1A+1F) (FLAPERON)** 

AIL1 FLP2 (CH1) AIL2 FLP1 (CH6) AIL1 (CH1) AIL2 (CH7) FLP (CH6) **GLID(2A+1F)**

AIL1 (CH1) FLP1 (CH6) FLP2 (CH5) AIL2 (CH7) **GLID(2A+2F)**79 Motor cut function ( MOTOR CUT) ( GLID  SURYLGHVDQHDV\ZD\WR VWRSWKHPRWRU E\ÀLSSLQJD VZLWFK U HJDUGOHVV RIWKH AIRBRAKE STICK position. The servo movement is largest at -30%.
The switch's location and direction must be chosen. It defaults to NULLto avoid accidentally assigning it to a switch, which might result in an unintentional dead VWLFNLQÀLJKW

Adjustability:

• RATErange of -30 to +30. The servo movementat 0% is maximum slow position of AIRBRAKE STICK . The servo movement is largest at -30%.

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL(mix always off) and Up&Cntrand Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate

positions of the same SWITCH
. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Decrease the rate to stop the motor ZLWKWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFK1RWHWKDW\RX MUST assign a switch. The default is NULL .) Open BASIC menu, then open THR-CUT function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to THR-CUT

. Activate the function. Choose desired switch and the position which activates the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFFor ON

. **C** to SW

. to desired switch. **C** to POSI

. to desired position. **C** to RATE

. until turns off. Close. Where next? 6HWXSGXDOWULSOHUDWHVDQGH[SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ): see p. 42. Set up TRAINER functions: see p. 47. Set up twin aileron servos: see p. 51. Set up twin elevator servos: see p. 57. *Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.80 GLIDER ADVANCE MENU Varied wing types and tail types(twin aileron servos, twin elevator servos, elevon, v-tail, etc). See p. 51-58 for basic information.

• FLAPERON ( GLID 1A+1FRQO\DLOHURQVHUYRVRSHUDWH LQRSSRVLWHGLUHFWLRQVDVDLOH URQVDQGVDPHGLUHFWLRQDVÀDSV6HH

p. 45.

• CAMBER FLAP SURYLGHVFDPEHUPRYHPHQWRUWULPPLQJRIÀDSV6HHS • For sailplanes, this function is also used as wing camber. The amount depends on the model, but usually a small

amount (less than 10%) is preferred, since too much camber produces excess drag. Don’t use more than about  ́WUDYHO XS RU GRZQ IRU JOLGHU FDPEHU 6RPH DLUIRLOV VXFK DVWKH5* VKRXOG EH ÀRZQZLWK12 UHÀH[ camber. Be sure to consult your model’s manual for guidelines. • Note that even though you may make CAMBER FLAPactive while using AILE-DIFF , it will not have any effect. The

21/<IXQFWLRQWKDWDOORZVFRQWURORIWKHDLOHURQVDVÀDSVLQWK H AILE-DIFFFRQ¿JXUDWLRQLVDLUEUDNHEXWWHUÀ\

• Aileron Differential (AILE-DIFF ): allows twin aileron servos to provide differential down travel from up travel. See p. 54.

• Using Twin Aileron Servos with FLAPERON and AILE-DIFF . See AIL-2 , p. 55.

• ELEVON IRUÀ\LQJZLQJV6HHS

• V-TAIL : for models with 2 servos operating together to create roll and pitch control. See p. 58.

• AILEVATOR : not available in GLID model types. Mixes:

• Linear Programmable mixes( PROG.MIX1-4 ): fully assignable programmable mixes with a linear response. see p. 68.

• Curved Programmable mixes ( PROG.MIX5-8 ): fully assignable programmable mixes with a curved response. See p.

71.

• ELEV-FLAP SUHSURJUDPPHGPL[FUHDWHVHOHYDWRUPRYHPHQWIURPWKHLQERDUG ÀDSVDVZHOODVHOHYDWRUV6HHS

• BUTTERFLY : Often called crow, BUTTERFLY is the glider version of AIRBRAKE . ( BUTTERFLY does not have the option to activate it solely from a switch, and its activation switch. It always provides progressively more BUTTERFLY as the CHANNEL 3 ( THROTTLE) STICK is lowered, or raised if used THR-REV , p.38.) See AIRBRAKE , p. 63.
Full Span Mixing: Flap-to-Aileron and Aileron-to-Flap

• CAMBER-MIX  AILE-FLAP 7KLV SUHSURJUDPPHGPL[LV XVHGWR FUHDWH IXOO VSDQ ÀDSDLOHU RQ DFWLRQ RQ D JOLGHU ZLWK  ZLQJVHUYRV7KLVFKDQJHVWKHFDPEHURYHUWKHHQWLUHZLQJZKLF KSURGXFHVOHVVGUDJWKDQMXVWGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVE\ themselves. NOTE: When you have ELEV-FLAPmixing also, the trailing edge droops with the elevators, increasing pitch response.81 AILE RUDD ( GLID ):

Adjustability:

• RATErange of -100 to +100. Negative setting would result in opposite rudder (aileron) action from aileron (rudder).

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL(mix always on) and Up&Cntrand Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate

positions of the same SWITCH
. • Condition : The separate AILE RUDD VHWWLQJVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQFDQEHVHW GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: ([58''ĺ$,/(  QR VZLWFK corrects roll coupling. Open AILE RUDD mix submenu. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to AILE RUDD

. Select the mixing mode. **C** to MODE

. to RUDD ĺ AILE Activate the function. **C** to MIX to ON

. Set the rate. (Ex: 100%each way) **C** to FLP1

. RUDDER STICK
. to +25%

. RUDDER STICK
. to +25%

. Repeat as needed. Close. Where next? ELEV-FLAPmixing. See p. 62. BUTTERFLY . See p. 63. Use a mix to OFFSETWKHÀDSVDVHWGLVWDQFHRQDVSHFL¿HGVZLWFKVHHS View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

You can select a pre-programed mix which is used to mix the rudders with aileron operation or the ailerons with rudder operation. Aileron-to-rudder mix (AILE ĺ RUDD ): automatically creates a "coordinated turn". Rudder -to-aileron mix ( RUDD ĺ AILE ): used to counterract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder input, especially in knife-edge.82 AILE-FLAP ( GLID 2A+2Fonly):

Adjustability:

• RATEUDQJHRIWR1HJDWLYHVHWWLQJZRXOGUHVXOWLQRSSRVL WHDLOHURQDFWLRQIURPÀDSV

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.

• POSITION fully assignable, including NULL(mix always on) and Up&Cntrand Cntr&Dn to activate the mix in 2 separate

positions of the same SWITCH
. • Condition : The separate AILE-FLAPVHWWLQJVIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQFDQEHVHW GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Turn on AILE-FLAP mixing. Set rate to100% for maximum possible flap travel with ailerons. Assign to SWITCH C

center. Open AILE-FLAPsubmenu. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to AILE-FLAP

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX to ON

. Set the rate. (Ex: 100%each way) **C** to FLP1

. AILERON STICK
. to +100%

. AILERON STICK
. to +100%

. Repeat above to set FLP2

. Assign the SWITCH and position. **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to CENTER

. Close. Where next? ELEV-FLAPmixing. See p. 62. BUTTERFLY . See p. 63. Use a mix to OFFSETWKHÀDSVDVHWGLVWDQFHRQDVSHFL¿HGVZLWFKVHHS View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

This pre-programmed mix is used to create full span aileron action on a glider with 4wing servos. This increases the roll rate and decreases induced drag. )RUQRUPDOÀ\LQJDYDOXHRIDERXWLVRIWHQXVHG)RUVORSH UDFLQJRU)% models in speed runs, you may wish to use a larger value approaching 100%.83 SPOILER MIX ( GLID PRYHVWKHVSRLOHUVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFKDQGLVX VHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWV$QG SPOILER MIX works linking with BUTTERFLY function.

Adjustability:

• Position : -100% to +100%, with a default of -50% (off), +50% (on)

• Channel: Spoiler 1: ch8, 5 or 3 (ch8 or 3*), Spoiler 2: NULL, ch5 or 3 (NULL or ch3*) * GLID (2A+2F) mode
• Elevator setting: Rate: -100% to +100%, Delay: 0% to 100%

• SWITCH A-H fully assignable. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: 2-servo spoiler mode. Adjust the spoiler servo position to 60%

. Open the SPOILER MIXfunction and move to 2nd page. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to SPOILER MIX

. to 2nd page. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ON

. Assign the SPO2-CH . (Ex: CH3) **C** to SPO2-CH

. to CH3

. Adjust the spoiler servo position. (Ex: SPO1 SPO2 = +55%to +60% ) **C** to +50% . ( SPO1 ) to +60%

. **C** to +50% . ( SPO2 ) to +60%

. Optional: Set the elevator rate. (EX: 10% ) **C** to rate
- ELE

. to 10%

. Optional: Set the delay. (EX: 25% ) **C** to dly

- ELE

. to 25%

. Close menu. Where next? Set up BUTTERFLY mixing: see p. 87.84 OFFSETs DGGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOHVSHFL¿FDOO\IRUVDLOSODQHV

Unnecessary fuselage motion is generated when there are sudden changes in the servo position. Variations in the operating time between channels can be suppressed by using the delay function ( -dly- ). NOTE: The same delay amount for elevator and rudder is recommended when using V-tail function. 7KH&*SURYLGHVRIIVHWWULPVWRDOORZWKHPRGHOHUDGGLWLR QDOVHWXSVDORQJZLWKWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ NORMAL , START , SPEED , DISTANCEand LANDING ) These offset trims have same setting abilities basically except the switch and dial assignment. For an example of trim settings, please see the following: Adjustability: 6HSDUDWHDGMXVWPHQWVIRUHDFKDLOHURQHOHYDWRUUXGGHUDQGÀ DSVHUYRIRUHDFK

condition.

• SWITCH G (10CAG) or E(10CHG) is programmed for NORMAL , START, and SPEED trims. SWITCH C is programmed for DISTANCE and LANDING trims. The VZLWFKSRVLWLRQDVVLJQPHQWLVDGMXVWDEOH CONDITION/FUNCTION )

• TRIM item (Digital trim operation mode):

NORM : normal trim operation mode, MIX : offset rate trim operation mode while mixing is on. • Optional assignable knob ( CAMBER MIX) to allow trimming in flight of the

DLOHURQDQGÀDSDFWLRQRIHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ *During OFFSEToperation, the aileron and elevator travels are displayed on each trim display in the Startup screen.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a START to gain maximum possible lift on launch. Each Aileron: 50%. Each Flap: 100%. Elevator: -5% to compensate. SWITCH (10CAG= G , 10CHG= E .) Note: switch is assignable. ( CONDITION ) KNOB (null) Note: knob is assignable. ( CAMBER MIX) Open OFFSETfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to OFFSET

. Switch to the STARTcondition. G(10CA) or E (10CH) from NORMALto START

. Set the rates. (Ex: AIL1 and 2 , 50% , FLP1 and 2 , 100% , ELEV -5% .) **C** to AIL1

. to +50%

. **C** to AIL2

. to +50%

. Repeat for, FLP1 and 2 , ELEV

. Close the function. Where next? View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\ These additional flight conditions contain different offset trims to make the saiplane perform certain maneuvers more easily. Aileron differential functions may be set to provide separate rates per condition selected. Prior to setting up OFFSET , you must activate the conditions and assign the switches in the CONDITION/FUNCTION

.85 Camber Mixing ( CAMBER MIX)( GLID ): This function adjusts the mixing rate of camber operation which operates the ZLQJ FDPEHU DLOHURQV DQG ÀDSVL QWKH QHJDWLYH DQG SRVLWLYH GL UHFWLRQV7KH DLOHURQÀDSDQGHOHYDWRUUDWHVFDQDOVREHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGH QWO\DQGDWWLWXGH changes caused by camber operation can be corrected. Also the operation reference point of camber control can be offset. ( PRE ) NOTE: Camber control is not assigned at default.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Ex: Set the mixing amount for aileron to 40 %, camber control to VR(E) , reference point to desired point. Open the CAMBER MIX function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to CAMBER MIX

. Choose desired slider. **C** to VR

. to VR(E)
. Adjust the mixing amount for AILE

. (Ex: adjust to 40% .) **C** to AILE

. VR(E)
. to 40%

. VR(E)
. to 40%

. Set the reference point. **C** to PRE

. or VR(E) to desired point. for one second. Close menu. Adjustability:

• Rate : -100% to +100%, with a default of +30%

• Reference point ( PRE ): The operation reference point of camber control can be offset. -100% to +100%, with a default of 0%. START DELAY ( GLID 1A+1F only): START DELAY automatically switches the offset trims ( OFFSET ) from the START condition's trims to the normal condition's trims after the delay time (max.10sec.). This delay time set by the -dly-item when activating the STARTcondition. (It is convenient for hand launch glider.) NOTE: The same delay amount for elevator and rudder is recommended when using V-tail function. Adjustability: • Delay time ( -dly- ) range of 0 to 100%. The delay time is 10 second at 100%. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Ex: delay time=5 second. Open ADVANCE menu, then open START DELAY function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to START DELAY

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFFor ON

. Set the delay time. (Ex: 50%each surface) **C** to ELEV

. to 5O%

. **C** to RUDD

. to 5O%

. Repeat as needed. Close.86 Flap Setting ( CAMBER FLAP )( GLID ): CAMBER FLAPassigns the primary flap control [defaults to VR(A) ] to allow LQÀLJKWWULPPLQJWKHÀDSV 7KH XSGRZQWUDYHO RI HDFK IODS FDPEHU IODSV FLP1  2 ) can be adjusted LQGHSHQGHQWO\$OVRWKHFHQWHUSRVLWLRQRIWKHÀDSVHUYRFDQE HRIIVHW NOTE: If FLAP-TRIM is activated, you can not use CAMBER FLAPfunction simultaneously.

[Note] When changing the polarity of a rate, "change rate dir?" is displayed for a check. Please set up after pressing DIAL for 1 second and canceling an alarm display. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Ex: Set the maximum travel of 35 % of WKHWRWDOÀDSWUDYHO Open the CAMBER FLAPfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to CAMBER FLAP

. $ GM X VW W KH X S G RZ Q W ULP DP R X QW separately. (Ex: adjust to 35% .) **C** to FLP1

. VR(A)
. to 35%

. VR(A)
. to 35% . Repeat. Option: Adjust the center position of ÀDSVHUYR **C** to CENTER

. to desired point. Close menu. Adjustability:

• Rate : -100% to +100%, with a default of +30%

• Center position ( CENTER 7KHRSHUDWLRQUHIHUHQFHSRLQWRIÀDSFDQEHRIIVHWW RZLWKDGHIDXOWRI87 BUTTERFLY (crow) mixing ( GLID ):

BUTTERFLY (often called "crow"- see GLID  S  IRU GHWDLOV VLPXOWDQHRXVO\PRYHVWKH ÀDSWZLQ DLOHURQ V DQG HOHYDWRU and is usually used to make steep descents or to limit increases in airspeed in dives. Two separate BUTTERFLY settings are available. ( CIR1  CIR2 ) Adjustability:

• Activation: Proportional by moving the THROTTLE STICK
. • Switch: Mix SWITCH is selectable. A

to H : SWITCH A to H NULL : always on. Also LOGIC SW ( Lsw1 to 3 ) may be assigned. Set up LOGIC SW : See p. 38.

• Inversely proportional to THROTTLE STICK : provides a proportional increase in amount of airbrake action as

THROTTLE STICK is lowered (when SWITCH A (assignable) is in the down position). Includes selectable stick position where airbrake begins. If you would like to have the airbrake be directly proportional to throttle stick, you will need to reverse the THR-REV function. Note that this changes the throttle stick direction for all models. See page 38 for instructions.

• Elevator settings: (adjustable in the B.FLY-ELE )

B.FLY-ELElinks elevator with the BUTTERFLY function. Elevator rate is adjustable in a 3 point curve. Point 1: PRESETpoint. (Fixed) Point 2: MID point. Position and rate are adjustable. Point 3: END point. Position and rate are adjustable.

• Delayed reaction: You can suppress sudden changes in your model's attitude when BUTTERFLY is activated by setting the delay ( DELAYLWHPWRVORZGRZQWKHHOHYDWRUUHVSRQVHDOORZLQJWKHÀDSVD LOHURQVHOHYDWRUWRDOOUHDFKWKHLUGHVLUHGHQG point together. A setting of 100%slows the servo to take approximately one second to travel the prescribed distance.

• Channels controlled: 7ZLQ DLOHURQV ÀDS DQG VSRLOHUPD\ EH VHWLQGHSHQGHQWO\LQ BUTTERFLY , including setting to 0 to

have no effect.

• Twin aileron servos: If AIL-DIFFfunction is inhibited, then AIL1 and AIL2settings will have no effect. • If AIL-DIFFis active, then CH1 and CH7 may be independently adjusted. • Normally both ailerons are raised equally in BUTTERFLY , and the elevator motion is set to maintain trim when the ailerons

rise. Different amounts may be set for each aileron to correct for torque reactions and other unique characteristics of the model. Be sure you understand what dropping ailerons will do when in BUTTERFLY . Along with creating an enormous amount of drag (desireble for spot landings), this also creates "wash-in", a higher angle of attack where the ailerons are, and encourages tip stalling. If you are using this for aerobatic performance and not "sudden stops", consider raising the DLOHURQVDQGGURSSLQJWKHÀDSVLQVWHDGDVVKRZQLQWKHGLDJUDP DERYH88 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Activate BUTTERFLY

. Adjust the aileron and flap travel to 75%

. Elevator settings are adjustable in the B.FLY-ELE

. Mix switch is selectable. Open the BUTTERFLY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to BUTTERFLY

. Activate the function. SWITCH A in up position. **C** to MIX to OFF

. Adjust the travels as needed. (Ex: Ailerons each 75% , Flap 75% .) **C** to AIL1 to 75%

. **C** to FLAP to 75%

. **C** to AIL2 to 75%

. Close menu. Where next? View additional model setups on the internet: www.futaba-rc.com\faq\

Channel 3's function selection ( CONDITION/FUNCTION ):

Channnel 3's function is selectable in the ARBK-FUNC item. (Throttle stick, switches, or knobs) By selecting anything other than STK , channel 3's function may be separated from BUTTERFLY'sfunction, so channel 3 can be used for other functions. Adjustability:

• Channel 3's function:

STK : THROTTLE STICK Sw-A to H : SWITCH A to H Vr-A to Vr-E : KNOB A to E89 HELICOPTER MODEL FUNCTIONS Please note that nearly all of the BASIC menu functions are the same for airplane (ACRO setup), sailplane ( GLID setups), and helicopter ( HELI ) setups. The features that are identical refer back to the ACRO chapter. The Helicopter BASIC menu includes the normal condition's throttle and collective pitch curves and revo. mixing. Idle-ups and throttle hold are advanced features and are in the ADVANCEmenu.
HELICOPTER FUNCTIONS.......................................... 89 Table of contents and reference info for helicopters . 89 Getting Started with a Basic Helicopter ................... 90 HELI BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS .................................. 93 MODELSubmenu: MODEL SELECT , COPY , NAME .......... 30 PARAMETER Submenu: RESET , MODUL , ATL , AILE-2 , CONTRAST , BACK-LIGHT , HOME-DISP , USER NAME , LOGIC SW ............................................................................. 33 MODEL TYPE( PARAMETERSsubmenu) ........................ 93 Servo REVERSE ........................................................... 38 SWASH AFR (swashplate surface direction and travel correction) (not in H-1 ) .............................................. 95 END POINT .................................................................. 39 Setting up the Normal Flight Condition ................... 97 THR-CUTVSHFLDOL]HGVHWWLQJVIRUKHOLFRSWHUVSHFL¿F models) ..................................................................... 98 'XDO7ULSOH5DWHVDQG([SRQHQWLDO D/R , EXP ) .......... 42 TIMER Submenu.......................................................... 45 Auxiliary Channel assignments and CH9 reverse (AUXCH ) ............................................................................. 46 TRAINER ..................................................................... 47 TRIM and SUB-TRIM ................................................... 48 SERVO Display ........................................................... 49 Fail Safe and Battery FailSafe ( F/S ) ......................... 50 HELI ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS ............................. 99 THROTTLE HOLD .......................................................... 99 THR-CURVE , PIT-CURVEand REVO ............................. 100 Idle-ups ................................................................... 101 7ULPVRIIVHW ............................................................. 102 Delay ....................................................................... 103 Hovering setups ...................................................... 104 +LJKORZSLWFK ........................................................ 105 Gyros and governors ............................................... 106 0L[HVGH¿QLWLRQVDQGW\SHV ..................................... 61 Linear, Prog. mixes1-4 ............................................. 68 Curve, Prog. mixes5-6 ............................................. 71 THROTTLE-NEEDLE ........................................................ 65 THROTTLE MIX ............................................................ 96 SWASH RING .............................................................. 9690 GETTING STARTED WITH A BASIC HELICOPTER This guideline is intended to help you set up a basic ( H-1 ) heli, to get acquainted with the radio, to give you a jump start on using your new radio, and to give you some ideas and direction on how to do even more with this powerful system than you may have already considered. It follows our basic format of all programming pages—a big picture overview of whatwe're trying to accomplish; a “by name” description of the steps to help acquaint you with the radio; and then a step-bystep instruction to leave out the mystery and challenge of setting up your model. %ULHÀ\WKHW\SLFDOKHOLFRSWHU¶VFRQWUROVDUHDVIROORZV

• Aileron: changes cyclic lateral (roll) . Rolls the helicopter. Tilts the swashplate to the left or right. CH1.

• Elevator: changes cyclic pitch. Changes the helicopter’s angle of attack (nose up or nose down). Tilts the entire

swashplate fore and aft. CH2.

• Rudder: changes the angle of the tail rotor. Yaws the helicopter left or right. CH4.

• Collective Pitch: adjusts main rotor collective [angle of the paddles], changing the main blades’ pitch. Increased

collective pitch (with throttle) causes the helicopter to rise. Moves in conjunction with throttle on the THROTTLE STICK . CH6.

• Throttle: RSHQVFORVHVFDUEXUHWRU0RYHVLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKFROOHFWLYH SLWFKRQWKH THROTTLE STICK . CH3.

• REVO : mix that adds rudder in conjunction with pitch. This helps compensate for rotation of the helicopter caused by the

LQFUHDVHGHQJLQHWRUTXH1HYHUXVHUHYRPL[LQJZLWKDKHDGLQJ KROG$9&6J\URWKHJ\URDOUHDG\GRHVWKLV )RUDGGLWLRQDOGHWDLOVVHHWKDWIXQFWLRQ
VVHFWLRQLQWKLVPDQXDO2WKHSDJHQXPEHUVDUHLQGLFDWHGLQWKH¿UVWFROXPQIRU\RX GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Prepare your helicopter. Install all servos, switches, receiver per your model's instructions. Set all trims, dials and sliders to neutral. &RQ¿UPDOOFRQWUROOLQNDJHVDUHGHJUHHVRUSHULQVWUXFWLRQV IURPWKHVHUYR horn to the ball link for proper geometry and that no slop is present. Mechanically adjust all linkages to get as close as possible to proper control throws and minimize binding prior to radio set up. Select the proper MODEL TYPE for your model. Ex: HELI ( H-1 ). See p. 93. [ N O T E : T h i s i s o n e o f s e v e r a l functions for which the radio requires confirmation to make a change. Only critical changes require additional key strokes to accept the change.] (If the correct model type was already displayed, be sure to do a model reset to discard any unwanted settings.) In the BASIC menu, open the PARAMETER submenu. Turn on the transmitter. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) then **C** to highlight PARAMETER

. to choose PARAMETER

. Go to MODEL TYPE

. **C** to TYPE

. Select proper MODEL TYPE

. Ex: HELI ( H-1 ). Confirm the change. Close PARAMETER

. to HELICOPTER

. for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. WRFRQ¿UP

**C** to SWASH

. to H-1

. for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. WRFRQ¿UP to return to BASIC menu. Then, NAMEthe model. P. 32. (You do not need to do anything to “ save” or store this data.) In the BASIC menu, open the MODEL submenu. **C** as needed to highlight MODEL

. to choose MODEL

. Go to MODEL NAME

. **C** to NAME

. (First character of model'sname is highlighted.) Input aircraft's name. Close the MODEL submenu when done. WRFKDQJH¿UVWFKDUDFWHU When proper character is displayed,

**C** to move to next character. Repeat. to return to BASIC menu.91 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Reverse servos as needed for proper control operation. Ex: LEFT RUDDER STICK results in leading edge of tail rotor blades moving left. Reverse to operate properly. P. 38. In the BASIC menu, open REVERSE

. **C** to REVERSE

. to choose REVERSE

. Choose desired servo and reverse its direction of travel. (Ex: reverse rudder servo.) **C** to CH4:RUDD

. so REV is highlighted. Are you sure?Displays. for 1 second. Repeat as needed. to return to BASIC menu. Adjust Travels as needed to match model's recommended throws (usually listed as high rates).P. 39. In the BASIC menu, choose END POINT

. **C** to END POINT

. to choose END POINT

. Adjust the servos’ end points. (Ex: elevator servo) Return to BASIC menu. **C** to ELEV

. ELEVATOR STICK
. until up travel is as desired. ELEVATOR STICK
. until down travel is as desired. Repeat as needed. Activate THR-CUT . P. 98. Open THROTTLE-CUTfunction. **C** to THROTTLE-CUT

. to choose THR-CUT

. Activate the function. Choose desired switch and position to activate. **C** to MIX to OFF

. **C** to SW

. to C

. **C** to POSI

. to DOWN

. With THROTTLE STICK at idle, adjust the rate until the engine consistently shuts off, but throttle linkage is not binding. 1 Close. C to down position. THROTTLE STICK
. **C** to RATE

. until shuts off. Set up throttle curve for normal. (Usually changes will not need to be made prior WR¿UVWÀLJKW3 Open the THR-CURV/NOR function. Adjust if needed. Close the function. **C** to THR-CURV/NOR

. . **C** to 1 >

. to 5%

. **C** to next point. Repeat. Set up collective pitch curve for normal ÀLJKW:H VXJJHVWD VWDUWLQJ SRLQW RI  center of +5,end of +8 to +10 degrees of blade pitch for aerobatics. 2(If just learning WRÀ\DVN\RXULQVWUXFWRU3 Open the PIT-CURV/NOR function. Adjust each point to match desired FXUYH([¿UVWSRLQW 8% .) Close the function. **C** to PIT-CURV/NOR

. . **C** to 1 >

. to 8%

. **C** to next point. Repeat. Set up revo. mixing for normal. (For heading-hold gyros, inhibit revo.) P. 97. Open the REVO./NOR function. Adjust to your desired starting point. (Ex: 10% .) Close the function. **C** to REVO./NOR

. . **C** to 1 >

. to 10%

. **C** to next point. Repeat. &RQ¿UP*\URGLUHFWLRQ1RWHLIXVLQJ D KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\UR XVHWKH GYRO programming for proper setup. See p. 106.) With radio on, move helicopter’s tail to the right by hand. The gyro should give right rudder input (leading edge of the tail rotor blades move left). If the gyro gives the opposite input, reverse direction on the gyro unit itself.92 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Learn how to operate HOVERING PITCH and HOVERING THROTTLE . See p. 104. Notice at half throttle, the VR(C) dial adjusts the throttle separately from the pitch. VR(A) adjusts the pitch separately from the throttle. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to SERVO

. throttle to center VR(C) VR(A) center dials. %H VXUHWR IROORZ \RXUPRGHO¶VLQVWUXFWLRQV IRU SUHÀLJKW FKHFNV  EODGHWUDFNLQJ HWF1HYHU DVVXPH D VHW RI EODGHV DUH properly balanced and will track without checking. Check receiver battery voltage! Always check voltage with a voltmeter prior to each and every engine start.(Never

DVVXPHEHLQJSOXJJHGLQDOOQLJKWPHDQV\RXUUDGLRJHDULVUHDG \WRÀ\,QVXI¿FLHQWFKDUJHELQGLQJVHUYROLQNDJHV and other problems can result in a dangerous crash with the possibility of injury to yourself, others and property. &RQ¿UPWKHVZDVKSODWHLVOHYHODWWUDYHO$GMXVWDUPVLIQHHG HG Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level and there is no binding. Repeat for full cyclic pitch and roll. If not, adjust as needed to correct in END POINT : see p. 39. Important note: prior to setting up throttle hold, idle-ups, offsets, etc, be sure to get your normal condition operating properly. Checking setup prior to going airborne: Check voltage! Then, with the assistance of an instructor, and having completed all range checks, etc, gradually apply throttle until the helicopter becomes “light on the skids.” Adjust trims as needed to correct for any roll, pitch, or yaw tendencies. If the tail “wags,” the gyro gain is too high. Decrease gyro gain. Where next?(Other functions you may wish to set up for your model.) THROTTLE HOLD : P. 99. SUB-TRIM p. 49 and separate trims for conditions ( OFFSETS ): p. 102. Governor setup: p. 108. IDLE-UPp. 101. DELAYsto ease servo response when switching idle-ups: p. 103. Rudder-to-throttle and other programmable mixes p. 68.

1 Periodically move the throttle stick to full and back down to ensure proper servo settings. 2It is critical that dials A and C be centered when the pitch and throttle curves are setup.93 HELI-SPECIFIC BASIC MENU FUNCTIONS MODEL TYPE : This function of the PARAMETER submenu is used to select the type of model programming to be used. Before GRLQJDQ\WKLQJHOVHWRVHWXS\RXUPRGHO¿UVW\RXPXVWGHFLGH ZKLFK MODEL TYPEEHVW¿WV\RXUDLUFUDIW,I\RXUWUDQVPLWWHU is a 10CAG, the default is ACRO . If it is a 10CHG, the default is HELI ( H-1 ). HELICOPTER SWASHPLATE TYPES: The 10CG radios support 8 basic swashplate setups, including "single servo" ( H-1 -many helicopters use this type) and 7 types of CCPM (cyclic and collective pitch mixing). A "single servo" swashplate uses one servo for each axis: aileron, elevator (cyclic pitch), and collective pitch. CCPM helicopters utilize a combination of servos working together to achieve the 3 axes of motion. There are 7 basic CCPM types, displayed below. CCPM has several advantages, the most obvious of which is far less mechanical complexity to properly move the swashplate of the helicopter. Additionally, several servos working in unison (ex: HR3, all 3 servos together create elevator movement) dramatically increases the torque available as well as the precision and centering. Please note that some helicopters are type HR3 or HN3 , except off by 180 degrees. For example, the Kyosho ®Caliber is HR3 but with the 2 parallel servos to the rear of the helicopter, not front. If your model's swashplate is off by 180 degrees, you will still use that swashplate type, but also use SWASH AFR (p.95) to adjust the functions as needed until it operates properly. Additionally, different angles of CCPM may also be created utilizing the fully assignable programmable mixes. (See our Frequently Asked Questions area at www.futaba-rc.com\faq\.) Not operating quite like you expected? ,QPDQ\&&30LQVWDOODWLRQV\RXQHHGWRHLWKHUUHYHUVHWKHGLUHF WLRQRIDVSHFL¿F function ( SWASH AFR ) or reverse a single servo's direction ( REVERSE ). See SWASH AFR for details. (p.95) Swashplate Types **HR3 H-1 H-3** 

ELE ELE

ELE1

ELE2 120 ̊
120 ̊ 120 ̊ PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT) PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT)

**HN3**
120 ̊

120 ̊ 120 ̊ ELE

PIT AIL **HE3**

ELE PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT)

PIT (AIL) AIL (PIT) **H-2**

PIT FRONT

AIL **H-4** ELE1

ELE2 AIL PIT **H4X** (Normal l i nkage type) **H-1** :each servo l i nked to the swashplate i ndependently.94 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Change the MODEL TYPEand SWASH TYPE of model #3 from aircraft to 120 degree CCPM with 2 servos working in unison for collective pitch and aileron [ HELI ( HR3 )]. Confirm you are currently using the proper model memory. (example: 3) On home screen, check model name and # on top left. If it is not the correct model (example:3), see MODEL SELECT , p. 25. Open PARAMETER submenu. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) to 2nd page of menu. **C** to PARAMETER

. Select proper MODEL TYPE

. ( HELICOPTER ) &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH **C** to TYPE

. to HELICOPTER

. for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. WRFRQ¿UP 1 Change to the desired SWASH TYPE (example: HR3.) &RQ¿UPWKHFKDQJH **C** to SWASH

. to HR3

. for 1 second. Are you sure?displays. WRFRQ¿UP Close. Where next? If a single servo is not operating properly, REVERSE : see p. 38. If a control is operating backwards (i.e. Elevator), see SWASH AFR , p. 95. If unsure see SWASH AFR

.

1 Radio emits a repeating “beep” and shows progress on screen as the model type is being changed. Note that if the power switch i s turned off prior to completion, the model type will not be changed.95 SWASH AFR (not in SWH1 ): Swashplate function rate settings ( SWASH AFR  UHGXFHLQFUHDVHUHYHUVHWKH UDWH (travel) of the aileron, elevator (except H-2) and collective pitch functions, adjusting or reversing the motion of all servos involved in that function, only when using that function. Since these types utilize multiple servos together to create the controls, simply adjusting a servo's REVERSEor END POINTwould not properly correct the travel of any one control. Since H-1 uses one servo for each function, there is no need for AFR in H-1

. This is fairly hard to explain but easy to see, so let's set up Kyosho ®Caliber's swashplate settings as an example. With everything installed per factory instructions, set the model to HELI ( HR3 ). Now let's adjust the swashplate properly. 6LQFH DLOHURQ DOZD\V XVHV QRPRUHWKDQ  VHUYRV FKHFNLW ¿UVW (LWKHU ERWK RSHUDWH SURSHUO\ QR FKDQJH QHHGHG ERWK operate backwards (reverse the whole function), or one servo operates backwards (reverse that servo alone). Next check elevator. Remember, the aileron servo(s) operate correctly, so if elevator does not, we should only have 2 choices left—the whole function needs to be reversed, or the servo(s) not shared with aileron need to be reversed. Last is collective. If the aileronand elevator controls are working properly, the onlything that could bewrong is the direction in which the collective operates (reverse the whole function). In our example, HR3 is 180 degrees off from the swashplate of the Caliber. Therefore, it is very likely that several functions will not operate properly. The collective pitch operation is backwards; but reversing all three servos would also reverse the aileron and elevator operations. Changing the collective pitch rate, however, from +50%to -50% , will reverse the collective pitch without affecting the aileron action. CHECKING FOR PROPER MOTION ON AN HR3 SWASHPLATE HR3 Swash Type PROPER MOTION WRONG MOTION HOW TO FIX AILERON STICK . Swashplate tilts right. Swashplate tilts left. Reverse AILsetting in SWASH to -50%

. Back of swashplate moves up. Ch6 servo moves incorrectly; REVERSE

. Back of Swashplate moves down. Ch1 servo moves incorrectly; REVERSE

. ELEVATOR STICK . Front of swash plate moves down; back of swashplate moves up. S w a s h p l a t e m o v e s t h e opposite. Reverse ELEsetting in SWASH

. (ex: +50 to -50 ) Entire swashplate moves up. Ch2 servo moves incorrectly; REVERSE

. RUDDER STICK . The leading edges of tail blades rotate left. Blades rotated right. REVERSEthe rudder servo. THROTTLE STICK . Entire Swashplate lifts. Swashplate lowers. Reverse PITsetting in SWASH

. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Adjust the travel of the collective pitch from +50%to -23% , reversing the travel of all 3 servos and decreasing their travel in collective pitch only, on an HR3 SWASH TYPE

. Open SWASH AFR function. for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to SWASH AFR

. Adjust PITC travel to -23%

. **C** to PITC

. to -23%

. Close the menu. Where next? &RQ¿UPWKHVZDVKSODWHLVOHYHODWWUDYHO$GMXVWDUPVLIQHHG HG Apply full collective and check that the swashplate remained level. If not, adjust servo's travels as needed to correct. END POINT : see p. 39. Set up the normal condition: (THR-CURV/NOR, PIT-CURV/NOR, REVO./NORM ): see p. 97. Set up D/R , EXP : see p. 42.96 Throttle Mixing ( THROTTLE MIX): This function can be set for each flight condition, and is used to correct the tendency of the model to change altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, elevator, and rudder controls.

Adjustability: 0L[LQJPD\EHVHWIURPWRIRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Correct the tendency of the model to change altitude. Open THROTTLE MIX function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to 2nd page of ADVANCEmenu. **C** to THROTTLE MIX

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX to ON

. Adjust the rate. Ex: IDL1 (AIL to TH) 10% **C** to IDL1 (AIL to TH) to 10%

. Repeat as needed. Close the menu. Where next? HI/LOW-PIT: see p. 105. GOVERNOR set up: see p. 108. Swash Ring ( SWASH RING OLPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRD¿[HGUDQJH This function limits the swash travel to prevent damaging the swash linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators. It is effective in 3D aerobatics which use a large amount of travel.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: To prevent damaging the swash linkage by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators, set the limit point where swash throw stops. *Adjust the rate at the maximum swash

tilt by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators Open SWASH RING function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) to 2nd page of ADVANCEmenu. **C** to SWASH RING

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX to ON

. Adjust the rate. Ex: 90% **C** to RATE to 90%

. Close the menu. •Swash travel by simultaneous operation of the ailerons and elevators is limited within the circle( SWASH RING rate). Adjustability: • Initial value: 100%. • Adjustment range: 0 to 200%. Aileron operationElevator operation97 Setting up the Normal Flight Condition: 7KH1RUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQLVW\SLFDOO\XWLOL]HGIRUKRYHULQJ 7KHWKURWWOHDQG FROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHVDUHDGMXVWHGWRSURYLGHFRQVLVWHQWHQJL QH530GHVSLWHWKHLQFUHDVHGHFUHDVHLQFROOHFWLYHSLWFKRI the blades. This keeps the engine from “bogging down” under excessive load (like trying to accelerate a car on a steep hill LQWKJHDURUH[FHVVLYH530XQGHULQVXI¿FLHQWORDGOLNHÀRRULQJWKHWKURWWOHZKLOHLQQHXWUDOULVNLQJHQJLQHGDPDJH $VWKHFXUYHVDQGUHYRPL[LQJDUHDOOLQWHUUHODWHGZHZLOO GLVFXVVDOOWKUHH¿UVWWKHQFRPSOHWHDVDPSOHVHWXS Note that the normal throttle, pitch and revo curves are all available in the BASIC menu for simplicity. These may also be updated later in the ADVANCEmenu with the settings for the other 4 conditions [idle-up 1 ( IDL1 ), idle-up 2 ( IDL2 ) and idleup 3 ( IDL3 ), plus throttle hold ( HOLD )]. Note: The throttle and pitch curves for the normal condition are always on. They cannot be inhibited. The other four conditions are activated with their throttle curves or throttle hold. For idle-ups, see p. 90. For throttle hold, see p. 99.

• THR-CURV/NOR : inputs the normal ( NORM ) throttle curve, which is usually not a linear response to THROTTLE STICK

motion. Adjusting point 4 of the curve adjusts the engine’s RPM at the THROTTLE STICK midpoint, the desired position for hovering. The other 6 points are then adjusted to create the desired idle and maximum engine speed, and a smooth transition in-between. For more on throttle curves, see p. 101.

• PIT-CURV/NOR : inputs the normal ( NORM ) collective pitch curve, the collective pitch curve for flight near hover. The

normal collective pitch curve is adjusted to match the throttle curve, providing the best vertical performance at a constant engine speed, with a starting curve of -4 base, +5 neutral, and +8 to +10 degrees of blade pitch maximum*. You can program the response over a 7-point curve for the best collective pitch angles relative to THROTTLE STICK movement. For more on collective pitch curves, see p. 101.

• REVO./NORM : mixes collective pitch commands to the rudder (a PITCH-RUDDER mix) to suppress the torque generated

by changes in the main rotor's collective pitch angle, keeping the model from yawing when throttle is applied. REVO . is H[WUHPHO\KHOSIXOLQ3WDPLQJWKHWDLO ́RIPRGHOVQRWXVLQJKHDGLQJKROG AVCSgyros. NOTE: There are three revo. mixes available: normal ( NORM LGOHXS   IDL1/2 ), and idle-up 3 ( IDL3 ). All 3 are adjustable in the ADVANCEPHQX1HYHUXVHUHYRPL[LQJLQFRQMXQFWLRQZLWKKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URV)RUGHWDLOVRQ revo, including default points for clockwise and counter clockwise rotating rotors, see p. 101. 7KHVH GHIDXOW UHFRPPHQGDWLRQV DVVXPH \RX DUH GRLQJ IRUZDUG ÀLJ KW ,I \RX DUHMXVWOHDUQLQJ SOHDVH IROORZ \RXULQVWUXFWRU¶V J XLGDQFH 6RPH LQVWUXFWRUVOLNHDEDVHSRLQWIRUWUDLQLQJVRWKDWWKHKHOLF RSWHUFRPHVGRZQYHU\VORZO\HYHQLI\RXULQVWLQFWVSXOOWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYHVWLFNWR the bottom in a hurry.98 GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up Normal Flight Condition Throttle/Collective Pitch Curves and Revo. Base point: Adjust base point of throttle curve until engine idles reliably on the ground. Adjust base point of collective pitch curve to achieve -4 degrees of blade pitch. Apply throttle until the model sits ‘light’ on its skids. Adjust base point of REVO . until model does not rotate its nose at all. Open the THR-CURV/NOR function. $GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([ 5% .) for 1 second. (If ADVANCE , again.) **C** to THR-CURV/NOR

. **C** to POINT-1

. to 5%

. Open the PIT-CURV/NOR function. $GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([ 8% .) **C** to PIT-CURV/NOR

. **C** to POINT-1

. to 8%

. Open the REVO. /NORM function. $GMXVWWKH¿UVWSRLQW([ 4% .) **C** to REVO. /NORM

. **C** to MIX

. to ON

. **C** to POINT-1

. to 4%

. Hover point: Adjust collective pitch curve to +5 degrees. Ease heli into a KRYHU /DQGVKXW HQJLQH RII$GMXVW throttle curves and rudder trim. Repeat until model hovers smoothly at half WKURWWOH5DSLGO\DSSO\WKURWWOHIURP WRVWLFN$GMXVW REVO . points 2 and 3 until the model does not rotate its nose up on throttle application. Adjust THR-CURV/NOR . Repeat above as needed. Adjust PIT-CURV/NOR . Repeat above as needed. Adjust REVO. /NORM . Repeat above as needed.

High point: Adjust collective pitch curve to +8 to +10 degrees. From hover, throttle up rapidly. If engine bogs, increase the throttle curve. If engine over-revs, increase the collective pitch curve at points 6 or 7. Apply full throttle while hovering, then descend back to a hover. Adjust REVO . until the nose does not change heading. Adjust THR-CURV/NOR . Repeat above as needed. Adjust PIT-CURV/NOR . Repeat above as needed. Adjust REVO. /NORM . Repeat above as needed.

Where next? GYRO function: see p. 107. Adjust HOV-THR and HOV-PITif needed: see p. 104. Setting up Throttle Hold: see p. 99. Setting up idle-ups 1, 2 and 3: Throttle and collective pitch curves and revo. mixing (THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX): see p. 101. GOVERNOR function: see p. 108. D/R , EXP : see p. 42.

THROTTLE CUT: The THROTTLE-CUTfunction is used to kill the engine at the end of a flight. The engine can be stopped with one touch of any switch, eliminating the need WRPRYHWKHWULPWR NLOOWKH HQJLQH DQGWKHQ UHDGMXVW SULRUWR HDFK ÀLJKW7KH helicopter THROTTLE-CUTLQFOXGHV DQ 212))WKURWWOH SRVLWLRQ QRUPDOO\ D little above idle). You must move the THROTTLE STICK back below the set point before the THROTTLE-CUTfunction can be reset, to avoid sudden engine acceleration. For a detailed example of throttle cut setup, see ACRO p. 41. Note: Be sure to add the step of setting a trigger point by cursoring to THRO , then putting the THROTTLE STICK in the desired position and pressing and holding the dial for one second. Notice that this function cannot be reversed to trigger only above the stick point.99 HELI -SPECIFIC ADVANCEMENU FUNCTIONS THR-HOLD : This function holds the engine in the idling position and disengages it from the THROTTLE STICK when SWITCH E (10CHG) or G (10CAG) is moved. It is commonly used to practice auto-rotation. Prior to setting up THR-HOLD , hook up the throttle linkage so that the carburetor is opened fully at high throttle, then use the digital trim to adjust the engine idle position. To have THR- HOLD maintain idle, move the THROTTLE STICK to the idle position, then move the hold SWITCH on and off and keep changing the offset value until the servo does not move. To lower the engine idle speed, or if you want to shut the engine off, input a higher negative number. Adjustability:

• Idling position: Range of -50% to +50%centered about the throttle idle position to get the desired engine RPM.

• Switch assignment: Assigned to SWITCH G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) down. Adjustable in the CONDITION SELECT( THR-HOLD item). (2-position type switch only)

• Throttle curve: Since the throttle is moved to a single preset position, no curve

is available for THR-HOLD

. • Collective pitch curve: Independent curve, typically adjusted to create a blade

pitch range of -4% to +10% to +12%, is automatically activated with THRHOLD

. • Revo. mix: Since revo. mix adjusts for torque from the engine, no revo. mix is available for THR-HOLD

. • Priority: The throttle hold function has priority over idle-up. Be sure that the throttle hold and idle-up SWITCHES are in the desired positions before trying to start the engine. (We recommend starting your engine in throttle hold for safety reasons.)

• Gyro: Gyro programming includes an option to have a separate gyro setting for each condition, including THR-HOLD

.

This avoids the potential problem of the user being in the wrong gyro setting when going to THR-HOLD , resulting in an improper rudder offset and the model pirouetting. GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up throttle hold. Determine desired throttle position of the idling engine, turn on THR-HOLD , and adjust percentage as required to reach the desired running point. Open THR-HOLD function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to THR-HOLD

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFF

. Set desired engine position. **C** to POSI

. to desired percent. Close. Where next? PIT-CURVEfor THR-HOLD: see p. 101. DELAY for THR-HOLD (to ease collective pitch response): see p. 103. GYRO setup: see p. 107. Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing( TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101. D/R , EXP : see p. 42.100 THR-CURVEand PIT-CURVE : These 7-point curves are utilized to best match the blade collective pitch to the engine RPM for consistent load on the engine. Curves are separately adjustable for normal, idle-up 1, idle-up 2, and idle-up 3. In addition, a separate collective pitch curve is available for throttle hold. Sample curves are displayed in the appropriate setup types (e x: QRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQSIRUFODULW\ Suggested defaults: • Normal: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 4 and 7 providing -4, +5, (+8 to +10)* degrees pitch. A throttle

curve setting of 0, 25, 36, 50, 62.5, 75, 100%. ,GOHXSV	,GOHXSVDQGDUHW\SLFDOO\WKHVDPHH[FHS WIRUWKHJ\URVHWWLQJVZLWKRQHEHLQJKHDGLQJKROG$9&6

and the other being normal mode. The pitch curve will likely be similar to the normal curve above. • Idle-up 3: Collective pitch curve that results in points 1, 4 and 7 providing (-8 to -10), 0, (+8 to +10) degrees. A throttle

curve of 100, 75, 62.5, 50, 62.5, 75, 100 to provide full throttle for inverted maneuvers. • Throttle Hold pitch curve: Start with the normal pitch curve (for inverted autos, start from the idle-up 3 pitch curve), but

LQFUHDVHWKHODVWSRLQWDSSUR[LPDWHO\LIDYDLODEOHWRHQ VXUHVXI¿FLHQWSLWFKDWODQGLQJ 7KHVH GHIDXOW UHFRPPHQGDWLRQV DVVXPH \RX DUH GRLQJ IRUZDUG ÀL JKW ,I \RX DUHMXVWOHDUQLQJ SOHDVH IROORZ \RXULQVWUXFWRU¶V JXLGDQFH 6RPH LQVWUXFWRUVOLNHDEDVHSRLQWIRUWUDLQLQJVRWKDWWKHKHOLF RSWHUFRPHVGRZQYHU\VORZO\HYHQLI\RXULQVWLQFWVSXOOWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYHVWLFNWR the bottom in a hurry.) Adjustability: • Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience. • All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCEmenu. • Automatically selected with the proper condition. 7KHLGOHXSFXUYHVDUHSURJUDPPHGWRPDLQWDLQFRQVWDQW530HY HQZKHQWKHFROOHFWLYHSLWFKLV UHGXFHGGXULQJÀLJKW

(including inverted). • To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up to COND> and change the curve named. • For clarity, the name of the condition currently active (switched on in the radio) is shown in parentheses behind name of

condition whose curve is being edited. (Example: see curve displays below. Note that the normal condition is active but the idle-up 1 condition’s curves are currently being edited.

• Moving and deleting the curve point : The curve point ( -stk- ) can be moved to the left or right by turning the DIAL (up to

LQIURQWRIWKHDGMRLQLQJSRLQWDQGGHOHWHGUHWXUQHGE\SUH VVLQJWKH DIAL for one second alternately.

• Copying the curve : To copy the current curve onto another condition’s curve, cursor up to COND> and press the DIAL for

one second. Then select to desired condition and press the DIAL for one second. • Idle-ups and throttle hold pitch curves may be edited even before the conditions have been made active. Activating their

throttle curves activates these conditions.

REVO. MIX : This 5-point curve mix adds opposite rudder input to counteract the changes in torque when the speed and collective pitch of the blades is changed. Adjustability: • Three separate curves available: normal for hovering; idle-ups 1 and 2 combined; and idle-3. • Normal condition curves are editable in the BASIC menu for convenience. • All curves may be adjusted in the ADVANCEmenu. &RUUHFWPL[LVDXWRPDWLFDOO\VHOHFWHGLQÀLJKWZLWKHDFKFRQGLWLRQDQGDXWRPDWLFDOO\DFWLYDWHGZKHQWKHWKURWWOHVHWXSIRU

that condition is activated in the programming (i.e. THROTTLE HOLD or THR-CURVE .) • To change which condition’s curve is being edited, cursor up above POINT5 and select. For clarity, the name of the

condition currently active (switched on at the radio) is shown in parentheses behind the name of the condition whose curve is being edited.101 Revo. mixing rates are 5-point curves. For a clockwise-turning rotor, the rudder is mixed in the clockwise direction when collective pitch is increased; for counterclockwise-turning, the opposite. Change the operating direction setting by changing the signs of the numbers in the curve from plus (+) to minus (-) and vice-versa. Suggested defaults: Clockwise rotation: -20, -10, 0, +10, +20% from low throttle to high. Counterclockwise rotation: +20, +10, 0, -10, -20% from low throttle to high. Adjust to the actual values that work best for your model. Revo. curves for idle-ups are often v-shaped to provide proper rudder input with negative pitch and increased throttle GXULQJLQYHUWHG ÀLJKW 5XGGHULV QHHGHGWR FRXQWHUWKH UHDFWLR Q ZKHQHYHUWKHUHLVLQFUHDVHGWRUTXH ,QLQYHUWHG ÀLJKW throttle stick below half has increased throttle and negative pitch, therefore increasing torque and rotating the helicopter unless the revo. mix is also increasing appropriately.)
IDLE-UPS: DGGLWLRQDO ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQV DYDLODEOH VSHFL¿FDOO\ IRU KHOLFRSWH UV7KHVH DGGLWLRQDO ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQV FRQWDLQ different throttle curves, collective pitch curves, revo. mixing, and trims (except IDLE-3 ) to make the helicopter perform certain maneuvers more easily. Lastly, the gyro and dual rate functions may be set to provide separate rates per condition selected, including one for each idle-up. 2QHRIWKHPRVWFRPPRQÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVLVVHWXSWRDOORZWKHK HOLFRSWHUWRHDVLO\ÀLSIURPXSULJKWWRLQYHUWHGDQGEDFN To do so, the pitch curve is set to 0 pitch at half stick, positive pitch (climb upright) above half, and negative pitch (climb when inverted) below half stick. The throttle curve is adjusted to allow the engine to run consistently throughout the changes in pitch. Additional idle-ups may be used to maximize the helicopter's flight characteristics in certain types of flight (i.e. fastforward motion, backward) or maneuvers (loops, rolls, stall turns), or even the same maneuver but changing from headingKROG$9&6J\URPRGHWRQRUPDOJ\URPRGH7KH&SURYLGHVLGO HXSVWRDOORZWKHPRGHOHUDGGLWLRQDOVHWXSVDORQJ ZLWKWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQ1RWHWKDW IDL3 does not include governor settings.) Adjustability:

• SWITCH G (10CAG) or E (10CHG) is programmed for normal ( NORM ), idleup 1 ( IDLE-UP1 ), and idle-up 2 ( IDLE-UP2 ) curves. Adjustable in the CONDITION SELECT( IDLE-UP1/2 , IDLE-UP3 items). ( IDLE-UP1/23-position type switch only, IDL3 2-position type switch only) • Activated with the throttle curve for that condition in THR-CURVE

. • Curves are adjusted to maintain constant RPM even when the collective pitch

is negative (inverted). • Note that REVO .mixing has one curve for idle-ups 1 and 2 and a second curve just for idle-up3. • Gyro settings may be set separately for each idle-up. (See p. 101.) *RYHUQRU VHWWLQJVPD\ EH VHW XSWR IROORZ 1RUPDO,GOH,GOH  EXW GR QRW RIIHU D VHWWLQJWR DGMXVW IRU HDFK RIWKH 

conditions like gyro. (See p. 101.) • Activating OFFSETmakes the TRIM LEVERS adjust the trim separately in each of the idle-up conditions. For an example of throttle and pitch curves and revo, please see Normal Flight Condition Setup, p. 97.102 OFFSET : Optional separate trims in addition to those for the normal condition. This function is used to automatically change WKHWULP RID KHOLFRSWHU)RUH[DPSOHZKHQWUDQVLWLRQLQJ IURP KRYHUWRÀ\LQJDW KLJK VSHHGDFORFNZLVHURWDWLRQ URWRU helicopter tends to drift to the right at high speed, so an aileron offset may be applied to offset the helicopter to the left. The necessary elevator offset varies with model geometry, so it must be determined by noting collective pitch changes at high speed. The rudder offset is affected by both revo. mixing and trim lever movement while in the offset function. Adjustability: • Complete switch assignability, plus a CONDITION SELECT RSWLRQWKDW FUHDWHV

switches between individual trims for each of the idle-ups. • When OFFSETis active (its switch is on), moving the TRIM LEVERS adjusts the stored offset, not the trims in the normal condition. • When OFFSETis inactive (its switch is off), the OFFSETand any trim adjustments

WRLWKDYHQRHIIHFWPRGHOREH\VWKHWULPVHWWLQJVRIWKHFXUU HQWO\DFWLYHÀLJKW condition.) • When OFFSETLVLQKLELWHGWULPDGMXVWPHQWVPDGHLQDQ\ÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQDII HFW DOOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQV • Rapid jumps caused by large offsets can be slowed using the DELAY function. *During OFFSEToperation, the aileron, elevator, and rudder travels are displayed on each trim display in the Startup screen.

NOTE: 5HPHPEHU RIIVHWV DQG UHYRPL[HV DUH QRW UHFRPPHQGHG ZKHQ XVL QJ KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 J\URV EHFDXVHWKH\ FRQÀLFWZLWKWKHDXWRPDWLFFRUUHFWLRQVWRWULPDQGWRUTXHWKDW $9&6SURYLGHV GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up separate trims for each of the three idle-up conditions. Adjust the idle-up 2 rudder trim to correct for torque at high speeds. Open the OFFSETfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to OFFSET

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to OFFor ON

. Change switch setting to Cond

. (No need to change SW .) already Cond

. Select IDL2

. **C** to No

. to IDL2

. Adjust trim settings as needed. (Ex:rudder to +8% .) **C** to RUDD

. to +8%

. &ORVHPHQXV DQG FRQ¿UP GLIIHUHQFHLQ trims between normal and idle-up 2. E(T10CHG) or G(T10CAG) from NORMALto IDL2 . Check that rudder trim changes. Where next? DELAY : see p. 103. THR-HOLD : see p. 99. Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing ( THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.103 DELAY : The Delay function provides a smooth transition between the trim positions whenever OFFSET , REVO. MIXING , or THROTTLE HOLD functions are turned on and off. Adjustability: • Separate delay times are available for aileron, elevator, rudder, throttle, and

pitch. • With a 50% delay setting, the servo takes about a half-second to move to its

new position...quite a long time. ,QJHQHUDOGHOD\VRIDSSUR[LPDWHO\DUHVXI¿FLHQW

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a delay on all channels to ease WKHWUDQVLWLRQ IURP RQH ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ to another so there are no "hard jumps." Open the DELAY function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to DELAY

. Adjust AILEresponse as needed. (Ex: aileron to +8% .) to +8%

. Repeat for other channels. **C** to ELEV . Repeat step above. Close menus and confirm slowed transitions. E(T10CHG) or G(T10CAG) from NORMALto IDL2 . Check that servos move gradually to new positions. Where next? THR-HOLD : see p. 99. Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing ( THR-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101.104 HOVERING ADJUSTMENTS ( HOV-THR and HOV-PIT ): +RYHULQJWKURWWOHDQGKRYHULQJSLWFKDUH¿QHWXQLQJDGMXVWPHQWV IRUWKHWKURWWOHDQGFROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHVLQGLYLGXDOO\ DIIHFWLQJSHUIRUPDQFHRQO\DURXQGWKHFHQWHUSRLQWDQGRQO\LQ WKHQRUPDOFRQGLWLRQ7KH\DOORZLQÀLJKWWZHDNLQJRIWKH curves for ideal setup.

Adjustability: 5RWRUVSHHGFKDQJHVFDXVHGE\WHPSKXPLGLW\DOWLWXGHRURWKHUFKDQJHVLQÀ\LQJFRQGLWLRQVDUHHDVLO\DFFRPPRGDWHG • Both adjustments may be inhibited if not desired. • Both adjustments may also be set to NULL , temporarily turning off the knob but maintaining the last memorized setting. • Adjustments may be memorized and then the knobs returned to center point to use that amount of adjustment. Allows

easy use of the trimming knobs for multiple models. (Note that when memorization is repeated with the knob offset from center, the trim value accumulates.) • Adjustments are quickly reset to the initial value by turning the dial until the trim reads 0%, memorizing, then returning

the knob to its center position. • Note that all functions, including these, assume the model hovers at half stick. • Available in normal ( NORM RUQRUPDOLGOHXS NORM/IDL1 ) condition only.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Fine-tune hovering with the hovering adjustments. Remember these affect only the hovering (normal) condition. Adjust throttle and collective pitch curves until the model hovers nicely. In ÀLJKWDGMXVWFROOHFWLYHSLWFKDQGWKURWWOH curves near hover point independently with HOV-THR and HOV-PITknobs. 6WRUHQHZVHWWLQJVDIWHUÀLJKW Open the HOV-THR function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to HOV-THR

. Optional: change which knob adjusts each hovering curve. NULLlocks in curve in last stored position. **C** to VR

. to desired knob and direction. Store the current dial settings prior to selecting another model. **C** to RATE

. for one second to store. or VR(C) to center. Close. Open the HOV-PITfunction. **C** to HOV-PIT

. Store the current dial settings prior to selecting another model. **C** to RATE

. for one second to store. or VR(A) to center. Close. Where next? THR-HOLD : see p. 99. Setting up the Idle-Ups: Throttle and Collective pitch Curves and Revo. Mixing ( TH-CURVE, PIT-CURVE, REVO. MIX) for idle-ups: see p. 101. D/R , EXP : see p. 42.105 HIGH/LOW PITCH ( HI/LO-PIT ): 7KLVIXQFWLRQPD\EHXVHGWRDGMXVWWKHFXUYHVKLJKDQGORZVLG HLQGLYLGXDOO\IRUHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQQRUPDOLGOHXS idle-up 2, idle-up 3, throttle hold). Adjustability: <RXPD\ GH¿QH KLJK DQGORZ VLGH UDWHWULP NQREV WKH KLJK VLG H SLWFKWULP

FRQWUROLVGH¿QHGDVWKHULJKWVLGHOHYHUDWLQLWLDOVHWWLQJ • The conditions are activated in the CONDITION SELECTfunction (p.100). • Both adjustments may be set to MANUAL , temporarily turning off the knob. • Adjustments may be memorized and then return the knobs to center point to

use that amount of adjustment. Allows easy use of the trimming knobs for multiple models.

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: Set up a high pitch curve in the idle-up 1 condition. 6WRUHQHZVHWWLQJVDIWHUÀLJKW Open the HI/LO-PITfunction. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to HI/LO-PIT

. Select the idle-up 1 condition. **C** to NORM

. to IDL1

. Set the rate. (Ex: 80% ) **C** to HI-PIT

. to 80%

. Optional: change which knob adjusts high pitch curve. **C** to VR

. to desired knob and direction. Store the current dial settings prior to selecting another model. **C** to HI-PIT

. for one second to store. or VR(E) to center. Close. Where next? PIT-CURVE : see p. 100. HOV-PIT : see p. 104.106 *<526DQG*29(512568VLQJHOHFWURQLFVWRWDNHVRPHRIWKHFRPS OH[LW\RXWRIVHWXSVDQGÀLJKW What is a gyro? A gyroscope is an electronic unit that senses motion and corrects for it. For example, if the wind blows \RXUKHOLFRSWHU¶VWDLOWRWKHOHIWDJ\URZLOOVHQVHWKDWPRWL RQFRQ¿UPLQJWKDWQRLQSXWZDVJLYHQDQGZLOOFRUUHFWIRULW How does it help in helicopter setup? A good gyro will totally eliminate the need for revo. mixing. The gyro will sense and correct the unwanted motion for you, so you don’t have to spend time to get a complex curve operating properly. Gyro sensor types: There are many different kinds of gyros. Early gyros were mechanical, with a spinning drum similar to a child’s gyroscopic toy. The next generation utilized a special type of crystal, called piezoelectric, which sensed the PRWLRQDQGSURYLGHGDQHOHFWULFDOSXOVH7KH¿QHVWJ\URVDWWKH WLPHRIWKLVZULWLQJDUH0(060LFUR(OHFWUR0HFKDQLFDO System) technology. These sensors, or computer chips, sense the motion. MEMS is far more accurate and less susceptible to inaccuracies caused by temperature changes, etc. Types of gyro responses: • Normal: sense motion and dampen it (if the gyro rotates off course for 2 seconds, it corrects for 2 seconds). +HDGLQJKROG$9&6 FDOFXODWHWKH DQJOH RI URWDWLRQ E\WUDFNL QJWKHWLPHUDWH RI FKDQJH DQGWKHQ SURYLGH FRUUHFWLRQ

until the same rotation is achieved. • Stick priority: a feature on most high-end gyros. The more input given on the channel the gyro controls, the less sensitive

the gain is automatically. This way, if you give a large input for a stall turn, for example, the gyro turns itself off and GRHVQRW¿JKWWKHVWDOOWXUQ$V\RXHDVHRIIWKH UXGGHUWKHJ DLQLQFUHDVHVDJDLQPLQLPL]LQJWDLOZDJDQGNHHSLQJWKH model straight. (If your gyro does not include stick priority, you can manually create it. Please see www.futaba-rc.com\ faq\.) Choosing the right gyro for your skills, your helicopter, and your budget: • Mechanical: some are still available. They are very challenging to set up and not as reliable as piezo or SMM. • Non-Heading-Hold Piezo: these are now inexpensive gyros that are reliable and easy to set up. Some have dual rates and

UHPRWHJDLQFRQWUROWRDGMXVWVHQVLWLYLW\LQÀLJKW7KH\GRKR ZHYHUODFNKHDGLQJKROGFDSDELOLWLHVIRUSUHFLVLRQÀ\LQJ • Heading-Hold Piezo: Until recently, the cream of the crop. Expensive, and more complex to set up. Adds GPS-like

KHDGLQJUHFRJQLWLRQ([KLELWVPLQRUGLI¿FXOWLHVZLWKWHPSHUDWXU HGULIWSRVLWLRQVHWWLQJYDU\LQJZLWKXQLW¶VWHPSHUDWXUH • Heading-Hold SMM: 21st Century gyro technology. Computer chip technology. Expensive, easier set up, higher

GXUDELOLW\6LJQL¿FDQWGHFUHDVHLQWHPSHUDWXUHVHQVLWLYLW\0DQ\LQFOXGHIUDPHUDWHVHWWLQJVWRDOORZIDVWHUUHVSRQVHZKHQ using specialized digital servos. Examples:

• GY401: Simpler set up. Ideal for learning aerobatics through 3D. • GY502: Better centering than 401 for more advanced aerobatics. Ideal through Class III competition. • GY611: Exceptional center. Extremely fast response time. Requires specialized servo. • Heading-Hold MEMS: GY520 is the smallest and lightest heading hold AVCS gyro available today. Its cutting-edge

MEMS (Micro Electro Mechanical System) sensor design, ultra high-speed processing speed and advanced PID control algorithm put it a quantum leap ahead of all other heading hold gyros in size, weight and performance. The GY520 has been optimized to work with small electric models and larger nitro (.30 through .91) sized helicopters. GYRO VLPSOL¿HVDGMXVWLQJVHOHFWLQJWKHJ\URVHQVLWLYLW\DQGFDQS URYLGHPRUHWKDQWZRJ\URJDLQVHWWLQJV7KHKLJKHUWKH gain, the more correction the gyro provides and the “softer” or less responsive the helicopter feels.) This function makes WKHEHVWSRVVLEOHXVHRIWKHLQÀLJKWDGMXVWDEOHJDLQRIPRVWJ\URV Adjustability: • Plug the gyro’s sensitivity adjustment to channel 5 of the receiver. (not assignable)

• STD DQG$9&6+HDGLQJKROG GYVHWXSW\SHVDYDLODEOHWRVLPSOLI\DGMXVWPHQWVIRU$9&6+HDGLQ JKROGJ\URV • Full switch assignability or may select Cond.option.

• Cond.option provides separate gyro settings, one for each condition, automatically selected with the condition. Allows

FKDQJHVLQJDLQWRPHHWWKHVSHFL¿FQHHGVRIHDFKÀLJKWFRQGLWL RQ • Each gyro setting may be set from 0 to +100 ( NOR 100% to AVC 100%) gain, equating to ATV settings of -100% to +100%. 'XDOPRGHJ\URVKHDGLQJKROG$9&6DQGQRUPDODUHHDVLO\WUL JJHUHGWRHDFKPRGHE\FKDQJLQJWKHJ\URVHWWLQJ¶VVLJQ

Negative settings trigger normal mode; positive settings are AVCS mode. • Larger percentages indicate more gain, or gyro responsiveness. • Tail wagging or shaking indicates excessive gain settings. Turn down gyro setting until wag stops.107 Gain Example for AVCS/Heading-hold Gyros ( GY

)

GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: 6HWXSDKHDGLQJKROG$9&6J\URZLWK KHDGLQJKROG$9&6 VHWWLQJLQLGOHXSV1 and 2 and normal mode setting in idleup 3 and normal. Open and activate the GYRO SENSE function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to GYRO SENSE

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

.Optional: change gyro type to Headinghold ( GY

). **C** to MODE

. to GY

. Optional: change switch assignment. Ex: select Cond

. **C** to SW

. to Cond

. Adjust gyro rates as needed. (Ex: NORM , IDL3 to NOR 50%

. IDL1 and 2 to AVC 50%as starting points.) **C** to NORM

. to NOR 50%

. **C** to IDL1

. to AVC 50%

. Repeat. Close the function. Where next? GOVERNOR : see p. 108. D/R , EXP : see p. 42. DELAY : see p. 103. 50% 0% +100% "Head i ng Hold Mode" "Normal Mode" C V A % 0 0 1 % 0 R O N % 0 0 1 

# GY

STD108 GOVERNORS:

What is a governor? A governor is made up of a set of sensors which read the RPM of the helicopter’s head, and a control unit that automatically adjusts the throttle setting to maintain a constant head speed regardless of changes in pitch of blades, weather conditions, etc. G overnors are extremely popular in competition helicopters due to the consistency provided. How does it help in helicopter setup? The governor eliminates the need to spend large amounts of time setting up throttle curves, as it automatically adjusts the engine’s RPM to maintain the desired head speed. GOVERNOR : The Governor mixing function is used to adjust the GV-1 (Governor) speed settings (rS1, rS2, rS3) from the transmitter. (If you are using a different governor, follow the manufacturer's instructions.) Adjustability: 2QRIIPD\EHVHSDUDWHGIURPURWRUVSHHGE\SOXJJLQJWKHJRYH UQRURQRIILQWR

ch8 and changing CUT-CH setting. ,I XVLQJ VHSDUDWH RQRII VZLWFK DVVLJQPHQWLVWRWDOO\ DGMXVW DEOH%H FDUHIXO

not to assign governor off to a condition switch if you want the governor to function in that condition. 6SHHGVZLWFKLQJDQGJRYHUQRU212))PD\EHWRJHWKHUXVLQJRQH VZLWFKRU

212))VZLWFKLQJPD\EHSHUIRUPHGXVLQJDQLQGHSHQGHQWVZLWFKF KDQQHO :KHQ VSHHG VHWWLQJ FRQWURO XVHV&+ DQG D VHSDUDWH 212)) VZL WFKLV QRW

used, CH8 can be used for other functions. ,QÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQWRIWKHKHDGVSHHGIRUHDV\DGMXVWPHQWGXULQJWXQLQJPD\

be created using an additional channel and a programmable mix. See www. futaba-rc.com\faq\ for details.



# GV-1 connections Magnet i c sensor Throttle servo
Control amp M i xture servo Connected only when fuel m i xture funct i on used.



### Throttle channel Speed sett i ng channel Connected when speed set from transm i tter 

### Governor ON/OFF / M i xture tr i m channel Connected when the governor i s turned on and off from transm i tter and when m i xture tr i m funct i on i s used, or when m i xture curve data i s sent from transm i tter to governor 

### Rece i ver109 The GV-1 controls throttle when it is active, so the throttle will not obey any FailSafe setting presets for throttle in the WUDQVPLWWHU$OZD\VVHWWKH)DLO6DIHVHWWLQJIRUWKH*9¶VRQ RIIFKDQQHOWR2))7KLVZD\WKHJRYHUQRULVVKXWRII and the throttle obeys the FailSafe throttle commands. Expert Tip: Mounting the GV-1 to the counter gear instead of the fan GUDPDWLFDOO\VLPSOL¿HVLQVWDOODWLRQLQPDQ\PRGHOV Setting example: :KHQVSHHGDQG212))DUHXVLQJRQHVZLWFK Governor Speed Switch Position ( Switch C or Cond.) Rate (%) Adjustment from Tx. RS1: OFF UPor NORM 0 Use up to 0%. (Governor speed display reads “off”.) RS2: 1400 CNTR or IDL1 50 Speed adjusted by raising and lowering rate. RS3: 1700 DOWN or IDL2 100 Speed adjusted by lowering rate. *The relationship of the governor speed setting rS1~rS3 and the switch positions conforms to the table above. *In throttle hold, always check that the governor is off. *If the speed value rises when the cut switch is activated, reverse the “ DIR ” setting from UPto DOWN or vice versa.
GOAL of EXAMPLE: STEPS: INPUTS: S e t u p a G V- 1 g o v e r n o r t o u s e b o t h c h a n n e l s i n t o t h e r e c e i v e r and switch between the governor settings automatically when changing conditions. Consider setting the battery FailSafe settings and other helpful functions on the GV-1 itself. Open and activate the GOVERNOR function. for 1 second. (If BASIC , again.) **C** to GOVERNOR

. Activate the function. **C** to MIX

. to ACT

. Optional: change cut-off channel to channel 8 and assign switch and direction for on/off (channel 8). **C** to cut- CH to +CH8

. **C** to cut- S W

. t o d e s i r e d SWITCH
. Optional: change switch assignment to select governor settings. Ex: select switch that adjusts the conditions. **C** to SW

. to Cond

. Adjust governor speed settings per switch position or condition as needed. (Ex: defaults are fine.) Allows head speed adjustment from transmitter. **C** to each Cond position. or as needed. **C** to next Cond position. Repeat. Close the function. Where next? GYRO : see p. 107. Adjust FailSafe ( F/S ) settings (p. 50). $GMXVWLGOHXSFROOHFWLYHSLWFKFXUYHIRUVDPHUDWHVRIFOLPE XSULJKWLQYHUWHG See p. 101. $GMXVW HOHYDWRUDLOHURQ UHVSRQVHWR ILW \RXU IO\LQJ VW\OH VHH D/R , EXPand END POINTSWASH AFR : p. 42, 39, 95.110 GLOSSARY '&RPPRQQDPHIRUFHUWDLQW\SHVRIDHUREDWLFPDQHXYHUV$LUFU DIWÀ\LQJEHORZWKHPRGHO¶VVWDOOVSHHGVXFKDVWRUTXH rolls. Helicopters: combining 2 or more maneuvers, such as rolling loop. 4.8V: 4.8 volt battery pack, made of 4 Ni-Cd 1.2V cells. See Accessories
. 5-cell: 6.0 volt battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories
. 6V (6Volt): battery pack, made of 4 alkaline cells or 5 Ni-Cd cells. See Accessories
. ACCELERATION : a delay mix which richens the engine mixture and then returns to normal to compensate for abrupt throttle changes. See THROTTLE-NEEDLE.

............................................................................................................................... ............. 65 Accessories: additional optional items which may be used with your 10CG. ...................................................... ............... 10 ACRO : model type designed for use with powered aircraft. Selected in the MODELsubmenu under TYPE . ........................... 34 ACRO vs GLID comparison. .................................................................................................................. .................................. 34 ACT . Active. Enables a feature to be utilized. Opposite of INH . Only visible in certain features. Adjustable Function Rate: see SWASH AFR

. $GMXVWDEOH6HUYR7UDYHO$67DVSHFL¿FW\SHRIHQGSRLQWDGMX VWPHQW6HH END POINT

. Adjustable Travel Limited (ATL ): End point adjustment for low end only, for throttle channel. See ATL

. $GMXVWDEOH7UDYHO9ROXPH$79DQROGHUOHVVVSHFL¿FWHUPIRU HQGSRLQWDGMXVWPHQW6HH END POINT

. ADVANCEPHQXV6SHFL¿FPHQXV IRUHDFKPRGHOW\SHZKLFKDOORZWKHPRGHO HUWRDFFHVVDQG SURJUDPWKH UDGLR¶VPRUH advanced features. AFR: Adjustable function rate. Used only in HELI model types with CCPM heads. See SWASH AFR

. AILE-2 : second aileron servo assignment. See Twin aileron servos
. AILE1/2/3/4 : Designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the aileron command. Ex: when using ailevators, the two elevator servos are also acting as ailerons 3 and 4 (unless you set their values to 0 ). See Twin aileron servosand Twin elevator servos
. AILE/RUDD ( GLID ): You can select a pre-programed mix which is used to mix the rudders with aileron operation or the DLOHURQVZLWKUXGGHURSHUDWLRQ$LOHURQWRUXGGHUPL[$,/(ĺ58' 'DXWRPDWLFDOO\FUHDWHVDFRRUGLQDWHGWXUQ5XGGHU WRDLOHURQPL[ 58''ĺ$,/( XVHGWR FRXQWHUUDFW XQGHVLUDEOH UR OO UROO FRXSOLQJWKDW KDSSHQV ZLWK UXGGHULQSXW especially in knife-edge. ..................................................................................................... ................................................. 81 Aileron: surface that controls the roll of the model. Also called cyclic roll on a helicopter. $LOHURQWRÀDSPL[LQJ0L[LQJ XVHGWRFUHDWH IXOOVSDQDLOHURQ DFWLRQ1RWD SUHSURJUDPPHGPL[6HH Programmable mix . This is the default setup of one mix in GLID

. Aileron-to-rudder mix: Mixing that automatically creates a “coordinated turn”. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setup of one curve mix in HELI  GLID

. Aileron Differential: Decreased down aileron travel when compared to up aileron travel. Minimizes “dragging” the low wing and creates more axial rolls. See Twin aileron servos. .............................................................................................. 51 Ailevator: two elevators on separate channels, also capable of acting as additional ailerons. See Twin elevator servos
. AILEVATORS : (ACRO ) Twin elevator servos plugged into separate channels, used to control elevator with the option to also act as ailerons in conjunction with the primary ailerons. ..................................................................... ................................ 56 Airbrake-to-elevator mixing: ( GLID ) Applies up or down elevator when airbrakes are deployed, correcting for any pitch change from the added drag. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix
. Airbrake: ( GLID /HDGLQJHGJHÀDSVRQJOLGHUVFRQWUROOHGE\ CHANNEL 3 (NORMALLY THROTTLE) STICK
. AIRBRAKE : (ACRO &RPELQHVHOHYDWRUÀDSDQGRSWLRQDOO\VSRLOHUVWRVXGGHQO\V ORZWKHPRGHOIRUVSRWODQGLQJV0D\EH111 triggered by THROTTLE STICK POSITION. For similar glider programming, see BUTTERFLY. ...................................... 63 $0$$FDGHP\RI0RGHO$HURQDXWLFV1RQSUR¿WRUJDQL]DWLRQJRYHU QLQJPRGHODLUFUDIWÀLJKWLQWKH86 ...................... 5 AST: Adjustable Servo Travel. See END POINT

. ATL : Adjustable Travel Limited. Standard type of trim used for throttle, where the trim is effective only in the idle portion of the THROTTLE STICK POSITION . Normal trims affect the entire travel of the servo (ex: elevator trims), but ATL trims only the low end of the throttle movement, allowing throttle idle adjustments that donit over-drive the servo at full throttle. ...................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 38 ATV: Older, less clear terminology for end point adjustment. See END POINT

. Autorotation: The ability of a helicopter to land safely without engine power, using the stored energy in the bladeis rotation WRSURGXFHOLIWIRUÀDULQJ AUX-CH : Auxiliary channel setup. Used to assign which KNOBS  SWITCHES  SLIDERS control channels 5-10. Includes channels 9-10 servo reverse. Also allows assignment of a channel to mixing only (assigned as NULL ), with no primary control. ............... 46 Backup battery: battery used to protect data storage in case of removal of master transmitter battery. In most Futaba radios, including the 10CG, EEPROM data storage is used, so no backup battery is used or needed. BACKUP ERROR : transmitter's hard-coded memory has been lost. Send for service immediately. ....................................... 24 Base-Loaded antenna: also called Whip antenna. Aftermarket equipment not approved by Futaba. Basic model setups: guidelines to setting up the most basic models of each type. ........................ ACRO 27 GLID 76 HELI 90 BASIC PHQXV6SHFL¿FPHQXVZLWKPRVWFRPPRQO\XVHGIHDWXUHVIRUHDFKPRGHOW\SH

.............. ACRO 30 GLID 78 HELI 93 Battery care and charging. (Charging the Ni-Cd batteries) ..................................................................... ............................ 15 Battery FailSafe: determines how the receiver indicates an airborne pack low-battery warning. Defaults: 56% throttle, requires throttle to idle to override. To adjust the warning point, set a THROTTLE STICK POSITION in F/S. .............. 50 BEEP: tone emitted by transmitter to signify a variety of situations. See Error messages
. Binding: friction in a joint exceeding the movement of the linkage. Sticking or inability to continue movement. The servo FRQWLQXHVWRDWWHPSWWRPRYHWKHVXUIDFHEH\RQGLWVSRZHUFDSDE LOLWLHVUDSLGO\GUDLQLQJEDWWHU\SRZHUDVLWFRQWLQXHVWR struggle. %UDNHÀDSPL[LQJ GLID 7KUHHPL[HVEUDNHÀDSWRHOHYDWRUWRDLOHURQDQGWRVSHHG ÀDSVFRPSHQVDWHIRUXQZDQWHG reaction to lowering the brake f lap, 2) increase brake flap areaby including the flaperons, and 3) add lift to increase maneuverability. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix
. Buddy Box: see Trainer box. BUTTERFLY : ( GLID ) [also called crow, AIRBRAKE (ACRO @$FWLYDWHV XS ÀDSHURQV DQG GRZQ ÀDSV IRU JOLGLQJ VSHHG FRQWU RO without spoilers or airbrakes. Note: More adjustable programming is available in ACRO , AIRBRAKE. ................................ 63 CAMBER FLAP( GLID DVVLJQVWKHSULPDU\ÀDSFRQWUROWRDOORZWULPPLQJLQÀLJKWR IWKHÀDSDFWLRQ7KHXSGRZQWUDYHORI HDFKÀDSFDQEHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\$OVRWKHFHQWHUSRVLWLR QRIÀDSVHUYRFDQEHRIIVHW ........................................... 86 CAMBER MIX ( GLID DGMXVWVWKHPL[LQJ UDWHRIFDPEHURSHUDWLRQZKLFKRSHUDWHVWKHZLQJFDPEHU DLOHURQVDQGÀDSVLQ WKHQHJDWLYHDQGSRVLWLYHGLUHFWLRQV7KHDLOHURQÀDSDQGHOH YDWRUUDWHVFDQDOVREHDGMXVWHGLQGHSHQGHQWO\DQGDWWLWXGH changes caused by camber operation can be corrected. .......................................................................... ............................. 85 CAMPac 2SWLRQDOH[WHQGHGGDWDVWRUDJHPRGXOH)XWDEDVWRFN'3. .. .................................................... 10 CCPM: Cyclic (pitch and roll) Collective Pitch Mixing. Multiple servos work in unison on the helicopter's head to create one or more of the control functions. Ex: Three servos set at 120 degrees operate the entire head. The two forward servos work together to rotate both the blade's pitch and the roll cyclic (aileron) in a HR3 head type. See MODEL TYPE , HELI

. CH5&6 : setting in AILE-2that allows the second aileron servo to be in channel 5. See Twin aileron servos
. CH6 or 7 : default setting in AILE-2 . Second aileron servo is in channel 6 or 7 depending on function used. See Twin aileron112 servos . &KDQQHOVZLWFKVHOHFWLRQDQGGLUHFWLRQFRQWURO6HH AUX-CH. ...................................................................................... 46 Channel delay: see THROTTLE DELAY (ACRO ) and DELAY( HELI ). Charge: to increase the electrical energy, measured as voltage, available in a battery pack. See Battery care and charging
. Condition: ( HELI VHSDUDWHÀLJKWVHWXSWKDWKDVVLJQL¿FDQWDGMXVWDELOLW\VHSDUDWHIURPWKHEDVLFPRGHOVHWXS6HH IDLEUP 1, 2, 3 and THROTTLE HOLD

. Contact information, North American Service Center. ........................................................................... ............................... 3 Copy model: see MODEL COPY

. Crow: see BUTTERFLY ( GLID ) and AIRBRAKE(ACRO ). Cursor: See SELECT BUTTONS
. Curve Mix: a mix that does not have the same reaction at all points along the master channel. See Programmable mix
. Cyclic: horizontal controls on a helicopter. Cyclic pitch is typically called elevator. Cyclic roll is typically called aileron

. 'DWDUHVHWHUDVHDOOGDWDLQDVSHFL¿FPRGHO6HH RESET

. DELAY : ( HELI ) slows the servo’s reaction time when changing from one condition to another. Eases any “jumps” in transition from one pitch setting to another, etc. Also see THROTTLE DELAY , p. 59 (ACRO ). ................................................................ 103 Delta peak charger: common name for a specialized charger designed and required to properly peak charge both NiMH and NiCd batteries, actually called a Zero Delta V Peak Charger. See Battery Care and Charging
. Dial: transmitter’s rotary control and button used in various ways during programming. ........................................ .......... 11 Dial mix: mix that uses a knob or slider as the master control, moving the slave servo based upon the movement of the knob or slider. See Prog. mix
. Differential: uneven movement in each directionof a control surface. Usually used when discussing ailerons or when describing an undesirable unevenness in movement of other controls. See Twin aileron servos
. 'LRGHDQHOHFWURQLFGHYLFHZKLFKRQO\DOORZVFXUUHQWWRÀRZRQ HGLUHFWLRQ8VHGWRSURWHFWUDGLRDJDLQVWSRZHUVXUJHDQG reversed polarity during charging. ............................................................................................ ........................................... 15 DIR-SW : switches that change between the four separate directions of snaps available. See SNAP ROLL

. Discharge: to deplete the electrical energy in a battery pack, usually to its lowest safe voltage, for storage or as a part of regular maintenance. See Battery care and charging
. DP16K: see CAMPac
. Dual aileron servos: (ACRO  GLID ) a model using two servos on two separate channels to operate ailerons. May include ÀDSHURQDFWLRQRUDLOHURQGLIIHUHQWLDO6HH Twin aileron servos. ........................................................................................ 51 Dual elevator servos: (ACRO  GLID ) a model using two servos on two separate channels to operate elevators. Includes elevon, V-tail, ailevator. See Twin elevator servos. ............................................................................................................. 56 Dual rates ( D/R , EXP UHGXFHLQFUHDVHWKHVHUYRWUDYHOE\ ÀLSSLQJDVZLWFKRUE\ VWLFNSRVLWLRQ8VHGWRPDNHPRGHOPRUH FRPIRUWDEOHWR À\LQ GLIIHUHQWPDQHXYHUV &* VXSSRUWVWULSOH  UDWHV E\ VLPSO\ DVVLJQLQJ GXDO UDWHVWRWKUHH SRVLWLRQ switches. Includes exponential function, see EXP. ................................................................................................................ 42 Elapsed Time Counter reset: see TIMER.

............................................................................................................................... 45 ELE1/2/3/4 : designation for the individual servos that are being commanded by the elevator command. Ex: when using elevon, the two wing servos are acting as elevators 1 and 2. See Twin elevator servos
. Elevator: surface which controls the model’s rate of climb or descent. Also called cyclic pitch on helicopters. Elevator-to-airbrake mix: ( GLID ) used to allow the model to loop even tighter on elevator input by having airbrakes work with elevators. Not a preprogrammed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default programming for one curve mix in GLID

.113 (OHYDWRUWRÀDSPL[ACRO  GLID 8VHGWRDSSO\ÀDSVDORQJZLWKHOHYDWRUVWRLQFUHDVHOLIWDOO RZLQJPRGHOHUWRÀ\DW slower speeds, make tighter loops or turns, etc. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setting of one mix in ACRO and GLID

. Elevator-to-pitch mix: ( HELI ) used to adjust pitch to counter the loss of angle of attack when elevator input is given. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setting of one mix in HELI

. ELEVON À\LQJZLQJFRQ¿JXUDWLRQZLWKWZRVHUYRVZRUNLQJWRJHWKHUWRF UHDWHERWKDLOHURQDQGHOHYDWRUDFWLRQ6HH7ZLQ elevator servos. .............................................................................................................. ...................................................... 56 Elevons: two surfaces, one on each wing, which work as both ailerons and elevators. See ELEVON

. END BUTTON: control button used during programming to return to previous menu or close menu altogether. END POINT : often abbreviated EPA. Adjusts the total travel ineach direction of proportional servos regardless of their control assignment. Ex: adjustment to AILchannel will adjust only the servo plugged into channel 1 even if being used DVRQHRIWZRÀDSHURQVRUHOHYRQV1RWH(QGSRLQWLVQRWDQDE VROXWHPL[LQJFDQVWLOOGULYHWKHVHUYR IDUWKHUWKDQWKLV setting. ....................................................................................................................... ........................................................... 39 Engine cut: see THROTTLE-CUT

. EPA: see END POINT

. (UURUPHVVDJHVZDUQLQJVFDXWLRQVSURYLGHGE\WKHUDGLRZKHQSR WHQWLDOSUREOHPVPD\H[LVW ........................................ 24 Exponential ( D/R , EXP ): adjustment to the relationship of STICK MOVEMENT to servo movement, typically used to soften overly sensitive models around center. ........................................................................................ ........................................ 42
FASST ® : Futaba Advanced Spread Spectrum Technology FailSafe ( F/S ): sets servo positions when interference is encountered or signal is lost. Also includes Battery FailSafe settings. ...................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 50 FLAP1/2/3/4 GHVLJQDWLRQIRUWKHLQGLYLGXDOVHUYRVWKDWDUHEHLQJFRPPDQGH GE\WKHÀDSFRPPDQGV([ZKHQDFWLQJDV ÀDSHURQVWKHWZRDLOHURQVHUYRVDUHDLOHURQVDQGDQGDOVR ÀDSVDQG XQOHVV\RXVHWWKHLUYDOXHVWRWKHQWKH\ PRYHRQO\DVDLOHURQQRPDWWHUZKDWÀDSFRPPDQGVDUHJLYHQ6H H Twin aileron servosand Twin elevator servos
. Flap-to-aileron mix: ( ACRO  GLID ) used to create full span flap reaction in flight. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setup of one mix in GLID

. Flap-to-elevator mix: (ACRO  GLID XVHGWRFRXQWHUDFWXQZDQWHGFKDQJHVLQSLWFKZKHQÀDSVDUHGHSOR\HG1RWD pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setup of one mix in ACRO and GLID

. FLAPERON RQHVHUYRRQHDFKDLOHURQSOXJJHGLQWRFKDQQHOVDQGZKL FKRSHUDWHERWKDVDLOHURQVDQGDVÀDSV6HH Twin aileron servos.
............................................................................................................................... ....................................... 51 FLAP-TRIM $GMXVWPHQW RI FHQWUDO SRVLWLRQ RI ÀDSHURQV GHIDXOW DVVLJQHG WR&+$11(/  KNOB . May also be used as SULPDU\RURQO\FRQWURORIÀDSHURQVDFWLQJDVÀDSVRURWKHUPL [HVPD\EHVHWXS6HH Twin aileron servos. .................. 53 Fuel mixture control: (ACRO  HELI ) see THROTTLE-NEEDLE

. FUNC : function mode of TRAINER , allows student radio to use the computer programming for that channel in the master UDGLR ([ DOORZV D VWXGHQW ZLWK D FKDQQHOWUDQVPLWWHUWR À\ DQ VHUYR DHUREDWLF SODQH R U D VHUYR KHOLFRSWHU 6HH TRAINER

. Gain: the responsiveness or amount of control given the gyro. On a high gain, the gyro is very active and overrides nearly all other actions. Too high a gain mayresult in “wagging” at the surface as the gyro over-corrects repeatedly in each direction. See GYRO SENS

. Gear doors: covers for retractable landing gear, may be operated separately from landing gear on some models. ............ 74 GLID : model type, glider. ......................................................................................................... ............................................. 75 Governor: electronic device that reads the speed at which the head is spinning, and adjusts the throttle servo to maintain114 the desired speed. GOVERNOR : ( HELI ) programming which eases the setup of the GV-1 governor. ................................................................. 106 *9SDUWQXPEHUQDPHIRU)XWDED
VHOHFWURQLFJRYHUQRU6HH Gyros and Governorsand GOVERNOR for details. Gyro, gyroscope: equipment that senses change in direction and provides input to compensate for that change. For description of aircraft use, see p. 66. For description of types, and helicopter use, see GYRO SENS

. GYRO SENS( ACRO  HELI ): gyro sensitivity programming designed to ease the setup and use of gyroscopes on model airplanes and helicopters. Manual pages include extensive descriptions of gyro types. ......................................... .... 73, 106 Gyros and Governors ........................................................................................................... .............................................. 106 +HDGLQJKROGJ\URJ\URWKDWVSHFL¿FDOO\PHDVXUHVWKHXQZDQWHG GHÀHFWLRQDQJOHDQGFRPSHQVDWHVXQWLODFRUUHVSRQGLQJ angle has been returned. See Gyros and Governors
. HELI : model type, rotary wing. See MODEL TYPE

. +HOLFRSWHUUDGLRWUDQVPLWWHUWKDWLQFOXGHVKHOLFRSWHUIULHQGO\VZLWFKDQGFRQWUROOD\RXWDQGVXI¿FLHQWSURJUDPPLQJWRDW least support a 5-channel helicopter. The 10CAG and 10CHG radios both contain all needed programming. The 10CHG has a more heli-friendly layout (through switch positioning and no ratchet on throttle for easier hovering) HI/LO-PIT( HELI PD\EHXVHGWRDGMXVWSLWFKFXUYHVKLJKDQGORZVLGHLQÀLJKW ............................................................. 105 High Rate: See D/R , EXP

. Hover: to maintain a stationary position relative to a point on the ground. HOVERING PITCH : see Hovering setups
. HOVERING THROTTLE : see Hovering setups
. +RYHULQJVHWXSVLQÀLJKWDGMXVWPHQWVWRSLWFKDQGWKURWWOHFXUYHVDURXQGFHQWHU THROTTLE STICK position (the ideal hovering point). .............................................................................................................. .................................................... 104 Idle management: varying settings and control of the modelis idle. Ex: using IDLE-DOWN to lower engine's idle point for landings and certain maneuvers; using THR-CUTfunction to safely and accurately shut the engine off as needed without requiring constant adjustment of throttle trims. .............................................................................. ..................................... 40 IDLE-DOWN : offset mix that slows the engineis idle point (decreasing the amount of travel of the throttle servo when at low THROTTLE STICK POSITION). Typically used to keep the model sitting still on the runway prior to take off, for slow aerobatic maneuvers such as spins, and for landings. See Idle management. ..................................................... ................ 40 IDLE-UP VHSDUDWHFRQGLWLRQFUHDWHGWRDOORZLQYHUWHGDQGRWKHUW\SHV RIÀLJKWZLWKDKHOLFRSWHUQRWHDVLO\DFKLHYHGLQWKH normal condition. Note: the idle-ups are activated by activating their throttle curves. Also note that OFFSETis available to create separate trims within each condition. .................................................................................. .................................... 101 ,QÀLJKWQHHGOHFRQWUROVHH THROTTLE-NEEDLE

. INH PDNHVDIHDWXUHLQDFWLYHXQDEOHWREHXVHG:KHQDIXQFWLRQL VLQKLELWHGLWFDQQRWEHXVHGHYHQLIWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFK LV217XUQVRIIIXQFWLRQDOLW\ZLWKRXWORVLQJDQ\VHWWLQJV2QO\YLVLEOHLQVSHFL¿FIHDWXUHV Inhibit: see INH

. Installation: radio installation and setup. ................................................................................... .......................................... 18 ,QYHUWHGWRÀ\DPRGHOXSVLGHGRZQ Kill switch: (1) throttle cut switch to close carburetor (see THR-CUT , p. 40). (2) gasoline ignition engine kill switch which removes spark to the plugs to stop the engine. ................................................................................ .................................... 74115 Launch setting: ( GLID ) see START-OFS

. Linear Mix: a mix that maintains the same relationship of master to slave throughout the whole range. Ex: a mix from RQHÀDSVHUYRWRDQRWKHUÀDSVHUYRDWFDXVHVWKHQGVHUYR WRIROORZWKH¿UVWVHUYR¶VPRYHPHQWH[DFWO\WKURXJKDOO points of travel. See Programmable mix
. LINK : mixing function that allows multiple mixes to work in conjunction with one another. See Programmable mix
. Linear : linear, directly proportional. See AIRBRAKE

. LOGIC SW : can be assigned to the following functions: THR-CUT , IDLE DOWN , AUX-CH , TIMER , PROG. MIX , AIRBRAKE , ELEVFLAP , and AILE-FLAPfunctions. The logic switch can activate functions by combining two switches. The two types of logic, either AND or OR, can be selected. ............................................................................................ ......................................... 38 LOW BATTERY ZDUQLQJWUDQVPLWWHU¶VEDWWHU\LVEHORZWKHVDIHÀLJKWYROWDJH 5HFKDUJHLPPHGLDWHO\6HH Error messages
. Low rate: see D/R , EXP

. MANUAL : controlled by a switch. Ex: see AIRBRAKE

. Master: the primary control. See Programmable mix
. Mechanical gyro: uses a mechanical gyroscope (like a child’s toy gyro) to sense change of angle. See Gyros and Governors
. MEMORY MODULE INITIALIZE : warning to indicate that the CAMPacinstalled in the port is not yet formatted or formatted for a different model of transmitter. Pressing the Dial initializes the CAMPac , deleting any existing data and formatting the CAMPacfor use in the 10CG. See Error codes
. Mix, mixing rate, mix offset, mix links: See Programmable mix
. MIXER ALERTZDUQLQJQRWL¿HVXVHUWKDWDPL[LVDFWLYDWHGZKLFKLVQRWFRQ VLGHUHGGHVLUDEOHIRUHQJLQHVWDUWXS6HH Error messages . 0RGHGH¿QLWLRQRIZKLFKFKDQQHOVDUHDVVLJQHGWRZKLFK STICK movements. Most 10CG radios shipped in the US are Mode 2, with elevator and aileron on the right STICK . To change mode, please visit www.futaba-rc.com. MODE BUTTON: control button on radio’s face used in various parts of programming. ................................................. 11 MODEL COPY : used to duplicate the settings of one model already in memory into a second model memory. Often used to set up two similar models, or make a copy of a working model to experiment with new setups. Also used to copy models WRIURPWKH CAMpacdata storage unit. ........................................................................................................... .................... 31 MODEL NAME : gives each model memory an 8-character name for easy recognition. In MODELsubmenu. .......................... 32 MODEL RESET : restore all data in a single model memory to defaults, including name and model type. See RESET

. MODEL SELECT FKRRVHWKHPRGHOPHPRU\\RXZLVKWRPRGLI\RUÀ\,Q MODELsubmenu. ................................................ 30 MODEL SELECTION ERROR : the memory last loaded in the transmitter is not currently available (usually because it is on a CAMPacnot currently in the transmitter). See Error messages
. MODEL TYPE VHOHFWWKHW\SHRIPRGHOWKHDLUFUDIWLVLQFOXGLQJDLUSODQH WZRJOLGHUW\SHVDQG¿YHKHOLW\SHV ................. 34 MODUL : modulation, means of transmitting data ( 2.4G-7CH, 2.4G-10CH ). In PARAMETER submenu. ..................................... 35 MOTOR CUT( GLID  SURYLGHV DQ HDV\ ZD\WR VWRSWKHPRWRU E\ ÀLSSLQJ D VZLWFK U HJDUGOHVV RIWKH$,5%5$.( 67,&. position. ...................................................................................................................... .......................................................... 79
Name: see MODEL NAME

. Neckstrap: optional strap to suspend transmitter during use. Futaba stock # FTA8. See Accessories
. Ni-Cd: Nickel Cadmium rechargeable battery. Typically used to power transmitter and receiver. See Battery care and charging
. NiMH: Nickel Metal Hydride rechargeable battery. Newer battery technology than Ni-Cd. Longer run times but more116 VSHFL¿FSHDNFKDUJLQJUHTXLUHPHQWV>5HTXLUHD]HURGHOWDSHDNFKDUJHUODEHOHGVSHFL¿FDOO\IRUXVHZLWK1L0+EDWWHULHV@ NORMAL : trainer mode that does not give student radio the computer programming features of the master radio. See Trainer
. NT8S: standard transmitter battery pack. See Accessories
. NULL : not assigned or never changed. Ex: a mix which has a null switch assignment is always active, and can never be FKDQJHGLQÀLJKWWXUQHGRIIQRPDWWHUZKLFKVZLWFKLVPRYHG OFFSET : ( HELI ) separate trim settings available to each idle-up (using CONDITION ) setting, or assigned to separate switches from the condition switches. When offset is ON , movement of the trim levers adjusts the OFFSET , not the normal condition's trims. ......................................................................................................................... ......................................................... 102 OFFSETs DGGLWLRQDOÀLJKWFRQGLWLRQVDYDLODEOHVSHFLI¿FDOO\IRUVDLOSO DQHV ......................................................................... 84 Offset mix: mix that independently moves the slave servo a set percentage of its total throw, not in relation to any master. See Programmable mix
. PA2: Pilot Assist. Optional onboard device that uses optical sensors to correct modelis orientation to upright. PARAMETER VXEPHQXVHWVVSHFL¿FSDUDPHWHUV,QFOXGHVUHVHWW\SHPRGXODWLRQVHFRQGDLOHURQVHUYRVHWXSDQG ATL . ... 33 Peak Charger: charger that automatically stops charging when the battery is fully charged (commonly called "peaked"). See Battery care and charging
. Piezo gyro: gyro that uses a piezo crystal to sense angular changes. See Gyros and Governors
. Pitch-to-rudder mix: see REVO

. PITCH CURVE : ( HELI  FXUYHWKDW VHWVWKH UHVSRQVH RIWKH FROOHFWLYH SLWFK VHUYRV WRPRYHPHQW RIWKHWKURWWOHFROOHFWLYH STICK ,QGHSHQGHQWO\DGMXVWDEOHLQWKHQRUPDOÀLJKWPRGHRQHIRUHD FKRIWKHWKUHHLGOHXSVDQGRQHIRUWKURWWOHKROG Adjusted to provide ideal blade response for various types of maneuvers being performed. For simplicity, the normal condition's curve may be set in the BASIC PHQX$OO¿YHFXUYHVDUHDOVRDGMXVWDEOHLQWKH ADVANCEmenu. ..................... 99 PPM: Pulse Position Modulation. Type of signal transmission. Programmable mix: used to cause specific servo responses to specific inputs separate from the basic control setups. ,QFOXGHVH[WHQVLYHGH¿QLWLRQVRIW\SHVDQGH[DPSOHV ........................................................................................................ 68 5DQJHFKHFNRUWHVWWRWHVWWKHWUDQVPLWWHULVFRQWURORYHUWKH PRGHODWDVSHFL¿FGLVWDQFHDVDSUHFDXWLRQLQFKHFNLQJLWV SURSHURSHUDWLRQSULRUWRÀLJKW

............................................................................................................................... ............. 18 Rate: amount of control given. Ex: see Programmable mix
. RESET : to delete all data in the existing model only. User CANNOT erase all data in the radio. Only service center can do so. Part of PARAMETER submenu. ..................................................................................................................... .................... 33 5HWUDFWDEOHODQGLQJJHDUODQGLQJJHDUWKDWLVEURXJKWXSLQWR WKHPRGHOGXULQJÀLJKW ..................................................... 74 REVERSE : servo reversing. Used to reverse the direction of a servo to ease installation and set up. .................................. .. 38 Rudder-to-aileron mix: ( ACRO  GLID ) used to counteract undesirable roll (roll coupling) that happens with rudder input, especially in knife-edge. Gives proper aileron input to counteract roll coupling when rudder is applied. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default programming for one linear and one curve mix in ACRO and GLID

. Rudder-to-elevator mix: used to counteract undesirable pitch (pitch coupling) with rudder input, especially in knife edge ÀLJKW1RWDSUHSURJUDPPHGPL[6HH Programmable mix . This is the default programming for one curve mix in ACRO

. Rudder-to-throttle mix: ( HELI ) adds throttle to counter the added load from increasing pitch of the tail blades, maintaining a constant head-speed with rudder. (This is a minor effect and is not critical in most helicopters.) Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix
.117 Rx: receiver. SAFE MODE : feature in snap roll programming that does not allow a snap roll if landing gear is lowered. See Snap roll
. Sailplane: glider, non-powered model aircraft type. See GLID  MODEL TYPE

. Select a model: see MODEL SELECT

. Service Center. ............................................................................................................... ........................................................ 3 SERVO EDUJUDSKGLVSOD\RQVFUHHQWRVKRZ UHDOWLPHPRYHPHQWFRPPDQ GVVHQWWRVHUYRVE\WUDQVPLWWHULQ UHVSRQVHWR user movements. Also includes a servo test feature. ........................................................................... ................................. 49 Servo reversing: see REVERSE

. Servo Slow: see Channel delay
. Servo testing, servo display: See SERVO

. SET : to accept. Usually done by pressing and holding the dial when instructed. Slave: channel that moves in response to the command of the master. See Programmable mix
. Slaving servos: see programmable mix
. ............................................................................................................................. 68 Slider assignability: sliders on side of radio, known as VR(D) and VR(E) in programming, may be assigned to control channels 5-8 in AUX-CH , used as the primary control of a mix in programmable mixes, etc. Slow: see Channel delay
. Smoke system: injects a specialized smoke oil into the hot exhaust to create air-show like smoke trails. ...................... ... 74 SNAP ROLL : (ACRO FRPELQHV UXGGHUHOHYDWRUDQGDLOHURQPRYHPHQWWRFDXVHWKHD LUFUDIWWRVQDSRUVSLQDWWKHÀLSRID switch. 10CG offers four separate snaps with one or two switches used for selection. .......................................... ............ 59 6SHHG)ODSVPDLQÀDSVRQD¿YHVHUYRJOLGHU SPOILER MIX ( GLID PRYHVWKHVSRLOHUVE\ÀLSSLQJWKHDVVLJQHGVZLWFKDQGLVX VHGWRPDNHVWHHSGHVFHQWV$QG SPOILER MIX works linking with BUTTERFLY function. .................................................................................................................... ... 83 START DELAY ( GLID 1A+1Fonly): automatically switch the offset trims ( OFFSET ) from the START condition's trims to the normal cndition's trims after proceeding the delay time (max.10sec.) which is preset when activating the START condition. It is convenient for hand launch glider. ...................................................................................... .......................................... 85 Stick adjustments: change stick tension and height. ........................................................................... ................................. 16 STk-THR: assigned to THROTTLE STICK . See AIRBRAKEfor example. SUB-TRIM XVHGWR¿QHWXQHWKHFHQWHURUQHXWUDOSRLQWRIHDFKVHUYR$ OORZVIXOOWULPIXQFWLRQIURPWKHWULPVOLGHUVIRU ÀLJKWWULPPLQJ

............................................................................................................................... ..................................... 49 SWASH AFR : ( HELI , CCPM types only) adjustment of the travel of all servos involved in the particular controlis movement only during the movement of that control. Ex: reverse the direction of movement of collective pitch while not affecting the direction of movement of either cyclic control. ............................................................................... .................................... 95 Swashplate type: ( HELI 3DUWRIWKHPRGHOW\SHVHOHFWLRQSURFHVV6HOHFWVVSHFL¿FKH OLVZDVKSODWHJHRPHWU\VXFKDVRQHRI four available types of "CCPM." ............................................................................................... .......................................... 95 SWASH-RING ( HELI OLPLWVWKHVZDVKSODWHWUDYHOWRZLWKLQD¿[HGUDQJH .......................................................................... 96 SWASH-THR ( HELI ): is corrected the tendency of the model to change altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, elevator, and other controls. ........................................................................................................... ..................................................... 85 Switch programmability: MOST features are reassignable to a variety of switches, including simply moving an auxiliary FRQWUROVXFKDVÀDSVIURPWKHVWRFNGLDOWRDVZLWFKRURWKHUO RFDWLRQ6HH AUX-CH

.118 7HFKQLFDO6SHFL¿FDWLRQV

............................................................................................................................... ......................... 9 7KHUPDOKXQWLQJVHWXSXVLQJVSHFL¿FSURJUDPPLQJVHWXSVWRKDYH WKHPRGHOUHVSRQGQRWLFHDEO\WRWKHOLIWRIDWKHUPDO Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix
. THR-DELAY : (ACRO ) throttle delay, slows engine servo response to imitate the spool-up action of a turbine engine. May also be used creatively to create a delayed servo on a different function (see www.futaba-rc.com\faq\faq-9c.html.) ............... 6 6 THR-REV : reverses the throttle trim function to the top of the THROTTLE STICK . ........................................................... 38 THROTTLE-NEEDLE : (ACRO  HELI ) curve mix that adjusts a second servo, controlling the engine’s mixture, to get optimum RPM and performance from the engine at all settings. .......................................................................... .............................. 65 Throttle-to-rudder mix: used to compensate with rudder when throttle is applied on take off. Not a pre-programmed mix. See Programmable mix . This is the default setting of a mix in ACRO and GLID

. THROTTLE CURVE : ( HELI ) adjusts how the servo responds to the THROTTLE STICK position along a 5 point curve. Separate curves available for each idle-up and normal. For simplicity, normal curve may be edited from BASIC menu. All curves may be edited together in the ADVANCEmenu. Activating an idle-up’s throttle curve is what activates that idle-up. .86,89 Throttle cut or throttle kill: THR-CUT . (ACRO  HELI ) Offset mix which closes the throttle servo to a set position when the assigned switch is moved to shut the engine off without having to alter trim settings. ........................................ ............... 40 THROTTLE HOLD : ( HELI ) makes the throttle servo non-responsive to THROTTLE STICK position, and moves the throttle to idle. Used to practice autorotations. NOTE: THR-HOLD must be activated, then the default pitch curve adjusted properly.

............................................................................................................................... .............................................................. 99 THROTTLE MIX ( HELI  FDQ EH VHW IRU HDFK ÀLJKW FRQGLWLRQ DQGLV XVHGWR FRUUHFW WKHWHQGHQF\ RIWKHPRGHOWR FKDQJH altitude when the rotor is tilted by aileron, elevator, and rudder controls. .................................................. ........................ 96 Throttle trim adjustment: see ATLto change throttle trim from “idle only” to full trim control like all other channels. See THR-REV to reverse THROTTLE STICK completely, including moving trim to the top of the THROTTLE STICK . See also Idle management for details on idle down and throttle cut functions. TIMER DGMXVWWKHWLPHUIXQFWLRQVXVHGWRNHHSWUDFNRIÀLJKWWLPH RQDWDQNRIIXHOHWF7KH3WULJJHU ́WRWXUQWLPHUVRQRII may be programmed. ............................................................................................................ ............................................... 45 TRAINER : software that allows two radios to be connected via trainer cord, giving student control of all or some of the FKDQQHOVRIWKHDLUFUDIWDWWKHÀLSRIDVZLWFK FUNC trainer mode allows student to use mixing in the master transmitter, for H[DPSOHGXDOUDWHVH[SRQHQWLDOÀ\DFKDQQHOKHOLFRSWHUZLWKDFKDQQHOEXGG\ER[HWF ........................................... 47 Trainer box: stripped-down radio system which does not have the ability to transmit, is used only as a student’s radio when instructing while using a trainer cord and the trainer programming. 7UDLQHUFRUGFRUGXVHGWRFRQQHFWWZRFRPSDWLEOHUDGLRVWRXVH IRUÀLJKWLQVWUXFWLRQ6HH Accessories
. TRIM menu: adjusts rate at which the trim responds to movement of the trim sliders. Also has a reset function to reset the model’s electronic trims to zero. ............................................................................................. ............................................. 48 TRIM OFFSET : ( HELI ) sets an offset or adjustment of trim when switching between conditions. See OFFSET
. TRIM option in mixes: ability to adjust the slave servo’s center when the master servo’s center is adjusted using the trim VOLGHUVIRUH[DPSOHZKHQXVLQJWZRVHSDUDWHÀDSVHUYRV6HH Programmable mix . ........................................................ 61 7ULSOHUDWHUGFRQWUROWUDYHOVHWWLQJDYDLODEOHLQÀLJKW6HH D/R , EXP

. 7ZLQDLOHURQVHUYRVXVHRIWZRRUPRUHVHUYRVRQVHSDUDWHFKDQQHOVWRFRQWURODLOHURQDFWLRQ,QFOXGHVÀDSHURQDLOHURQ differential, and elevon. ..................................................................................................... .................................................. 51 Twin elevator servos: use of two or more servos on separate channels to control the elevator of a model. Includes elevon, ailevator, V-tail. ............................................................................................................ ........................................................ 58 Tx: transmitter.119 Voltmeter, voltage reading: displays transmitter voltage on home screen. ...................................................... .................... 23 VR(A-E) : variable rate controls. Knobs and sliders on the radio. See switch assignment chart for default assignments. VR(A-C) are knobs; VR(D-E) are sliders on the case sides. V-tail model Mix: (ACRO  GLID ) programming used to control a V-tail model’s tail surfaces, with two servos operating two control surfaces as both rudder and elevator. See Twin elevator servos
. Warning messages: cautions provided by the radio when certain potential problems exist. See Error messages
. Warranty information. ......................................................................................................... ................................................... 3 Website: www.futaba-rc.com. Internet location of extensive technical information Futaba products. ............................. .... 3